10 WB140-2 Shop Manual

CEBM009802
Shop
Manual
WB140-2N
WB150-2N
BACKHOE LOADER
WB140-2N A20001
SERIAL NUMBERS and UP
WB150-2N A60001
This material is proprietary to Komatsu Utility Division and is not to be reproduced, used, or disclosed except in accordance
with written authorization from Komatsu Utility Division.
It is our policy to improve our products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. We reserve the right to make changes or
add improvements at any time without incurring any obligation to install such changes on products sold previously.
Due to this continuous program of research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication. It is recom-
mended that customers contact their distributor for information on the latest revision.
May 2003 Copyright 2003 Komatsu

Published in USA Komatsu America Corp.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-1 c
FOREWORD CONTENTS
12
CONTENTS 00
10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
20 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
90 OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1
00-2 c WB140-2N, WB150-2N

PRODUCT PUBLICATIONS INFORMATION
Various product Parts and Service Publications are available to all KOMATSU construction equipment
owners, including operation and maintenance manuals, parts books and service manuals.
Special publications, such as service tool, air conditioning and turbocharger service manuals are also
available as well as selected Operation and Service manuals in foreign languages.
The Publications listed below are available for this particular machine(s).
DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER
PARTS BOOK - PAPER:

Chassis and Engine (WB140-2N). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEPB020801
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

Chassis and Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEAM009402
SHOP MANUAL
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEBM009802
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEBM4D9801
SAFETY MANUAL
Machine specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BL10-3
Parts and Service Publications can only be acquired by authorized KOMATSU distributors using the
Komatsu America International Company Parts Inventory Processing System (PIPS) or the Extranet Lit-
erature Ordering System.
If the PIPS system is not available at the distributor location, then the following Requisition for Technical
Service Publications and Service Forms can be used. Form KDC91E is shown on the reverse side of this
page.
WB140-2N pubinfok - REV2.fm 5/2/03

REQUISITION FOR TECHNICAL SERVICE PUBLICATIONS AND SERVICE FORMS
COMPLETE FORM DataKom Publishing Division

AND RETURN TO 440 North Fairway Drive
Vernon Hills, IL 60061-8112 U.S.A.
Attn: Service Publications
Fax No. (847) 970-4186
Tel No. (847) 970-5887
COMPANY NAME
SHIP TO PURCHASE ORDER NO.
ATTN.
STREET ADDRESS ORDER DATE

TYPE or PRINT
ONLY CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE
COUNTRY
PHONE NO. FAX NO. SHIPPING METHOD DISTR/BRANCH CODE
IMPORTANT - TO ASSURE SHIPMENT OF THE CORRECT PUBLICATION(S), THE MODEL NUMBER AND
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE SHOWN.
QTY. PUBLICATION FORM NO. PARTS BOOK PUBLICATION MODEL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
P-Paper DESCRIPTION
➥
M-Microfiche
KDC91E 040202 CURRENT PRICES WILL BE CHARGED

FOREWORD
The affected pages are indicated by using the following Mark Indication Action
marks. It is requested that necessary actions be taken to
these pages according to the table below. ❍ New page to be added Add
● Page to be replaced Replace
( ) Page to be deleted Discard
Mark Page Rev Mark Page Rev Mark Page Rev Mark Page Rev
● 00-1 c 10-7 10-36 10-65
● 00-2 c 10-8 10-37 10-66
● 00-2-1 c 10-9 10-38 10-67
● 00-2-2 c 10-10 10-39 10-68
❍ 00-2-3 c 10-11 10-40 10-69
❍ 00-2-4 c 10-12 10-41 10-70
00-3 10-13 10-42 10-71
00-4 10-14 10-43 10-72
00-5 10-15 10-44 10-73
00-6 10-16 10-45 10-74
00-7 10-17 10-46 10-75
00-8 10-18 10-47 10-76
00-9 10-19 10-48 10-77
00-10 10-20 10-49 10-78
00-11 10-21 10-50 10-79
00-12 10-22 10-51 10-80
00-13 10-23 10-52 10-81
00-14 10-24 10-53 10-82
00-15 10-25 10-54 10-83
00-16 10-26 10-55 10-84
00-17 10-27 10-56 10-85
00-18 10-28 10-57 10-86

10-29 10-58 10-87
10-1 10-30 10-59 10-88
10-2 10-31 10-60 10-89
10-3 10-32 10-61 10-90
10-4 10-33 10-62 10-91
10-5 10-34 10-63 10-92
10-6 10-35 10-64 10-93
WB140-2N, WB150-2N WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-2-1 2

FOREWORD
10-94 20-22 b 20-55 b

10-95 20-23 b 20-56 b ❍ 30-1 c
10-96 20-24 b 20-57 b ❍ 30-2 c
10-97 20-25 b 20-58 b ❍ 30-3 c
10-98 20-26 b 20-59 b ❍ 30-4 c
10-99 20-27 b 20-60 b ❍ 30-5 c
10-100 20-28 b 20-61 b ❍ 30-6 c
10-101 20-29 b 20-62 b ❍ 30-7 c
10-102 20-30 b 20-63 b ❍ 30-8 c
10-103 20-31 b 20-64 b ❍ 30-9 c
10-104 20-32 b 20-65 b ❍ 30-10 c
20-33 b 20-66 b ❍ 30-11 c
20-1 b 20-34 b 20-67 b ❍ 30-12 c
20-2 b 20-35 b 20-68 b ❍ 30-13 c
20-3 b 20-36 b 20-69 b ❍ 30-14 c
20-4 b 20-37 b 20-70 b ❍ 30-15 c
20-5 b 20-38 b 20-71 b ❍ 30-16 c
20-6 b 20-39 b 20-72 b ❍ 30-17 c
20-7 b 20-40 b 20-73 b ❍ 30-18 c
20-8 b 20-41 b 20-74 b ❍ 30-19 c
20-9 b 20-42 b 20-75 b ❍ 30-20 c
20-10 b 20-43 b 20-76 b ❍ 30-21 c
20-11 b 20-44 b 20-77 b ❍ 30-22 c
20-12 b 20-45 b 20-78 b ❍ 30-23 c
20-13 b 20-46 b 20-79 b ❍ 30-24 c
20-14 b 20-47 b 20-80 b ❍ 30-25 c
20-15 b 20-48 b 20-81 b ❍ 30-26 c
20-16 b 20-49 b 20-82 b ❍ 30-27 c
20-17 b 20-50 b 20-83 b ❍ 30-28 c
20-18 b 20-51 b 20-84 b ❍ 30-29 c
20-19 b 20-52 b 20-85 b ❍ 30-30 c
20-20 b 20-53 b 20-86 b ❍ 30-31 c
20-21 b 20-54 b ❍ 30-32 c
00-2-2 2 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD
❍ 30-33 c ❍ 30-66 c ❍ 30-99 c ❍ 30-132 c
❍ 30-34 c ❍ 30-67 c ❍ 30-100 c ❍ 30-133 c
❍ 30-35 c ❍ 30-68 c ❍ 30-101 c ❍ 30-134 c
❍ 30-36 c ❍ 30-69 c ❍ 30-102 c ❍ 30-135 c
❍ 30-37 c ❍ 30-70 c ❍ 30-103 c ❍ 30-136 c
❍ 30-38 c ❍ 30-71 c ❍ 30-104 c ❍ 30-137 c
❍ 30-39 c ❍ 30-72 c ❍ 30-105 c ❍ 30-138 c
❍ 30-40 c ❍ 30-73 c ❍ 30-106 c ❍ 30-139 c
❍ 30-41 c ❍ 30-74 c ❍ 30-107 c ❍ 30-140 c
❍ 30-42 c ❍ 30-75 c ❍ 30-108 c ❍ 30-141 c
❍ 30-43 c ❍ 30-76 c ❍ 30-109 c ❍ 30-142 c
❍ 30-44 c ❍ 30-77 c ❍ 30-110 c ❍ 30-143 c
❍ 30-45 c ❍ 30-78 c ❍ 30-111 c ❍ 30-144 c
❍ 30-46 c ❍ 30-79 c ❍ 30-112 c ❍ 30-145 c
❍ 30-47 c ❍ 30-80 c ❍ 30-113 c ❍ 30-146 c
❍ 30-48 c ❍ 30-81 c ❍ 30-114 c ❍ 30-147 c
❍ 30-49 c ❍ 30-82 c ❍ 30-115 c ❍ 30-148 c
❍ 30-50 c ❍ 30-83 c ❍ 30-116 c ❍ 30-149 c
❍ 30-51 c ❍ 30-84 c ❍ 30-117 c ❍ 30-150 c
❍ 30-52 c ❍ 30-85 c ❍ 30-118 c ❍ 30-151 c
❍ 30-53 c ❍ 30-86 c ❍ 30-119 c ❍ 30-152 c
❍ 30-54 c ❍ 30-87 c ❍ 30-120 c ❍ 30-153 c
❍ 30-55 c ❍ 30-88 c ❍ 30-121 c ❍ 30-154 c
❍ 30-56 c ❍ 30-89 c ❍ 30-122 c ❍ 30-155 c
❍ 30-57 c ❍ 30-90 c ❍ 30-123 c ❍ 30-156 c
❍ 30-58 c ❍ 30-91 c ❍ 30-124 c ❍ 30-157 c
❍ 30-59 c ❍ 30-92 c ❍ 30-125 c ❍ 30-158 c
❍ 30-60 c ❍ 30-93 c ❍ 30-126 c ❍ 30-159 c
❍ 30-61 c ❍ 30-94 c ❍ 30-127 c ❍ 30-160 c
❍ 30-62 c ❍ 30-95 c ❍ 30-128 c ❍ 30-161 c
❍ 30-63 c ❍ 30-96 c ❍ 30-129 c ❍ 30-162 c
❍ 30-64 c ❍ 30-97 c ❍ 30-130 c ❍ 30-163 c
❍ 30-65 c ❍ 30-98 c ❍ 30-131 c ❍ 30-164 c
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-2-3 2

FOREWORD
❍ 30-165 c
❍ 30-166 c
❍ 30-167 c
❍ 30-168 c
❍ 30-169 c
❍ 30-170 c
❍ 30-171 c
❍ 30-172 c
❍ 30-173 c
❍ 30-174 c
❍ 30-175 c
❍ 30-176 c
❍ 30-177 c
❍ 30-178 c
90-1
90-2
90-3
90-4
90-5
90-6
90-7
90-8
90-9
90-10
00-2-4 2 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

PRODUCT PUBLICATIONS INFORMATION
Various product Parts and Service Publications are available to all KOMATSU construction equipment
owners, including operation and maintenance manuals, parts books and service manuals.
Special publications, such as service tool, air conditioning and turbocharger service manuals are also
available as well as selected Operation and Service manuals in foreign languages.
The Publications listed below are available for this particular machine(s).
DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER
PARTS BOOK - PAPER:

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

Chassis and Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEAM009401
SHOP MANUAL
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEBM009800
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEBM4D9801
SAFETY MANUAL
Machine specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BL10-3
Parts and Service Publications can only be acquired by authorized KOMATSU distributors using the
Komatsu America International Company Parts Inventory Processing System (PIPS) or the Extranet Lit-
erature Ordering System.
If the PIPS system is not available at the distributor location, then the following Requisition for Technical
Service Publications and Service Forms can be used. Form KDC91E is shown on the reverse side of this
page.
WB140-2N pubinfok.fm 1/14/03

REQUISITION FOR TECHNICAL SERVICE PUBLICATIONS AND SERVICE FORMS
COMPLETE FORM DataKom Publishing Division

AND RETURN TO 440 North Fairway Drive
Vernon Hills, IL 60061-8112 U.S.A.
Fax No. (847) 970-4186
Tel No. (847) 970-5887
COMPANY NAME
SHIP TO PURCHASE ORDER NO.
ATTN.
STREET ADDRESS ORDER DATE

TYPE or PRINT
ONLY CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE
COUNTRY
PHONE NO. FAX NO. SHIPPING METHOD DISTR/BRANCH CODE
IMPORTANT - TO ASSURE SHIPMENT OF THE CORRECT PUBLICATION(S), THE MODEL NUMBER AND
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE SHOWN.
QTY. PUBLICATION FORM NO. PARTS BOOK PUBLICATION MODEL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
P-Paper DESCRIPTION
➥
M-Microfiche
KDC91E 040202 CURRENT PRICES WILL BE CHARGED

FOREWORD SAFETY
12
SAFETY 00
SAFETY NOTICE 00
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE 00
Proper service and repair is extremely important for the safe operation of your machine. The service and repair techniques
recommended and described in this manual are both effective and safe methods of operation. Some of these operations
require the use of tools specially designed for the purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbols and are used to mark safety precautions in this manual. The cautions accom-
panying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any dangerous situation arises or may possibly arise, first con-
sider safety, and take the necessary actions to deal with the situation.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 00 PREPARATIONS FOR WORK 00
Mistakes in operation are extremely dangerous. Read the 1. Before adding oil or making repairs, park the machine
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL carefully on hard, level ground, and block the wheels or tracks to
BEFORE operating the machine. prevent the machine from moving.
1. Before carrying out any greasing or repairs, read all the 2. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket or any
precautions given on the decals which are fixed to the other work equipment to the ground. If this is not possi-
machine. ble, insert the safety pin or use blocks to prevent the
work equipment from falling. In addition, be sure to
2. When carrying out any operation, always wear safety lock all the control levers and hang warning signs on
shoes and helmet. Do not wear loose work clothes, or them.
clothes with buttons missing.
● Always wear safety glasses when hitting parts with a 3. When disassembling or assembling, support the
hammer. machine with blocks, jacks or stands before starting
● Always wear safety glasses when grinding parts with a work.
grinder, etc.
4. Remove all mud and oil from the steps or other places
used to get on and off the machine. Always use the
3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a trained,
handrails, ladders or steps when getting on or off the
experienced welder carry out the work. When carrying
machine. Never jump on or off the machine. If it is
out welding work, always wear welding gloves, apron,
impossible to use the handrails, ladders or steps, use a
glasses, cap and other clothes suited for welding work.
stand to provide safe footing.
4. When carrying out any operation with two or more
workers, always agree on the operating procedure PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK 00
before starting. Always inform your fellow workers 1. When removing the oil filler cap, drain plug or hydrau-
before starting any step of the operation. Before starting lic pressure measuring plugs, loosen them slowly to pre-
work, hang UNDER REPAIR signs on the controls in vent the oil from spurting out. Before disconnecting or
the operator's compartment. removing components of the oil, water or air circuits,
first remove the pressure completely from the circuit.
5. Keep all tools in good condition and learn the correct
way to use them. 2. The water and oil in the circuits are hot when the engine
is stopped, so be careful not to get burned. Wait for the
6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep tools and oil and water to cool before carrying out any work on
removed parts. Always keep the tools and parts in their the oil or water circuits.
correct places. Always keep the work area clean and
make sure that there is no dirt or oil on the floor. Smoke 3. Before starting work, remove the leads from the battery.
only in the areas provided for smoking. Never smoke ALWAYS remove the lead from the negative (-) termi-
while working. nal first.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-3

FOREWORD SAFETY
12
4. When raising heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that the wire rope, chains and hooks are free from damage.
Always use lifting equipment which has ample capacity. Install the lifting equipment at the correct places. Use a hoist or
crane and operate slowly to prevent the component from hitting any other part. Do not work with any part still raised by
the hoist or crane.
5. When removing covers which are under internal pressure or under pressure from a spring, always leave two bolts in posi-
tion on opposite sides. Slowly release the pressure, then slowly loosen the bolts to remove.
6. When removing components, be careful not to break or damage the wiring, Damaged wiring may cause electrical fires.
7. When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil from spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips on to the floor, wipe it up immediately.
Fuel or oil on the floor can cause you to slip, or can even start fires.
8. As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash parts. In particular, use only the minimum of gasoline when washing elec-
trical parts.
9. Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places. Replace any damaged part with new parts.
● When installing hoses and wires, be sure that they will not be damaged by contact with other parts when the machine is
being operated.
10. When installing high pressure hoses, make sure that they are not twisted. Damaged tubes are dangerous, so be extremely
careful when installing tubes for high pressure circuits. Also check that connecting parts are correctly installed.
11. When assembling or installing parts, always use the specified tightening torques. When installing protective parts such as
guards, or parts which vibrate violently or rotate at high speed, be particularly careful to check that they are installed cor-
rectly.
12. When aligning two holes, never insert your fingers or hand. Be careful not to get your fingers caught in a hole.
13. When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that the measuring tool is correctly assembled before taking any measure-
ments.
14. Take care when removing or installing the tracks of track-type machines. When removing the track, the track separates
suddenly, so never let anyone stand at either end of the track.
00-4 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD GENERAL
12
GENERAL 00
This shop manual has been prepared as an aid to improve the quality of repairs by giving the serviceman an accurate under-
standing of the product and by showing him the correct way to perform repairs and make judgements. Make sure you under-
stand the contents of this manual and use it to full effect at every opportunity.
This shop manual mainly contains the necessary technical information for operations performed in a service workshop. For
ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following sections. These sections are further divided into each main
group of components.
GENERAL
This section lists the general machine dimensions, performance specifications, component weights, and fuel, coolant and
lubricant specification charts.
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
This section explains the structure and function of each component. It serves not only to give an understanding of the
structure, but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
This section explains checks to be made before and after performing repairs, as well as adjustments to be made at comple-
tion of the checks and repairs. Troubleshooting charts correlating “Problems” to “Causes” are also included in this section.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains the order to be followed when removing, installing, disassembling or assembling each component,
as well as precautions to be taken for these operations.
MAINTENANCE STANDARD
This section gives the judgement standards when inspecting disassembled parts.
NOTICE
The specifications contained in this shop manual are subject to change at any time and without any advance notice. Contact
your distributor for the latest information.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-5

FOREWORD HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL
12
HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL 00
VOLUMES 00
Revised pages are shown at the LIST OF REVISED PAGES
between the title page and SAFETY page.
Shop manuals are issued as a guide to carrying out repairs.
They are divided as follows: SYMBOLS 00
Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model So that the shop manual can be of ample practical use,
Engine volume: Issued for each engine series important places for safety and quality are marked with the
following symbols.
Electrical volume: Each issued as one to cover all models
Attachment volume: Each issued as one to cover all models
Symbol Item Remarks
These various volumes are designed to avoid duplication of Special safety precautions are
information. Therefore to deal with all repairs for any model, Safety necessary when performing the
it is necessary that chassis, engine, electrical and attachment work.
be available.
Special technical precautions or
other precautions for preserving
DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATING 00
★ Caution
standards are necessary when
performing the work.
Any additions, amendments or other changes will be sent to
your distributors. Get the most up-to-date information before Weight of parts or systems. Cau-
you start any work. tion necessary when selecting
Weight
hoisting wire or when working
FILING METHOD 00
posture is important, etc.
Places that require special atten-
1. See the page number on the bottom of the page. File the Tightening
tion for tightening torque during
pages in correct order. torque
assembly.
2. Following examples show how to read the page number:
Example: Places to be coated with adhe-
Coat
sives and lubricants etc.
10 - 3
Places where oil, water or fuel
Oil, water
must be added, and the capacity.
Item number (10. Structure and Function)
Places where oil or water must
Consecutive page number for each item Drain be drained, and quantity to be
drained.
3. Additional pages: Additional pages are indicated by a
hyphen (-) and numbered after the page number. File as
in the example.
Example:
10-4
10-4-1
Added pages
10-4-2
10-5
REVISED EDITION MARK 00
When a manual is revised, an edition mark (123…) is

recorded on the bottom outside corner of the pages.
REVISIONS 00
00-6 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS
12
HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS 00
HOISTING 00
can result. Hooks have maximum strength at the middle
portion.
WARNING! Heavy parts (25 kg or more)
must be lifted with a hoist etc. In
the DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY section, every part
weighing 25 kg or more is indi-
cated clearly with the symbol
● If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the machine

by hoisting, the following checks should be made:
1. Check for removal of all bolts fastening the part to the 3. Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone, but sling
relative parts. with two or more ropes symmetrically wound on to the
2. Check for existence of another part causing interface load.
with the part to be removed.
WARNING! Slinging with one rope may
WIRE ROPES 00 cause turning of the load during
hoisting, untwisting of the rope,
1. Use adequate ropes depending on the weight of parts to or slipping of the rope from its
be hoisted, referring to the table below: original winding position on the
load, which can result in a dan-
Wire ropes gerous accident
(Standard “Z” or “S” twist ropes without galvanizing)
4. Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a wide
Rope diameter Allowable load
hanging angle from the hook. When hoisting a load with
mm kN tons two or more ropes, the force subjected to each rope will
increase with the hanging angles. The table below
10 9.8 1.0
shows the variation of allowable load (kg) when hoist-
11.2 13.7 1.4 ing is made with two ropes, each of which is allowed to
sling up to 1000 kg vertically, at various hanging angles.
12.5 15.7 1.6
When two ropes sling a load vertically, up to 2000 kg of
14 21.6 2.2 total weight can be suspended. This weight becomes
1000 kg when two ropes make a 120° hanging angle. On
16 27.5 2.8
the other hand, two ropes are subject to an excessive
18 35.3 3.6 force as large as 4000 kg if they sling a 2000 kg load at a
lifting angle of 150°
20 43.1 4.4
22.4 54.9 5.6
30 98.1 10.0
40 176.5 18.0
50 274.6 28.0
60 392.2 40.0
★ The allowable load value is estimated to be 1/6 or 1/7 of

the breaking strength of the rope used.
2. Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the hook.
Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause the rope to
slip off the hook during hoisting, and a serious accident
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-7

FOREWORD COATING MATERIALS
12
COATING MATERIALS 00
★ The recommended coating materials prescribed in the shop manuals are listed below.
Category Code Part No. Quantity Container Main applications, features
● Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber
LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube
cushions and cork plugs from coming out
● Used in places requiring an immediately
effective, strong adhesive.
20 g Polyethylene ● Used for plastics (except polyethylene,
LT-1B 790-129-9050
(2 pes.) container polypropylene, tetrafluoroethylene, and
vinyl chloride), rubber, metal and non-
metal.
● Features: Resistance to heat, chemicals
Polyethylene
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g ● Used for anti-loosening and sealant pur-
container
poses for bolts and plugs.
Adhesive:
790-129-9060
1 kg
(Set of adhesive ● Used as adhesive or sealant for metal, glass
LT-3 Hardening Can
and hardening or plastic.
agent:
agent)
500 g
Adhesives
Polyethylene
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g ● Used as sealant for machined holes.
container
Holtz ● Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing
790-126-9120 75 g Tube
MH 705 engine.
● Quick hardening type adhesive.
Three
Polyethylene ● Cure time: within 5 sec. to 3 min.
bond 179-129-9140 2g
container ● Used mainly for adhesion of metals, rub-
1735
bers, plastics and woods.
● Quick hardening type adhesive.
Aron- ● Quick cure type (max. strength after 30
Polyethylene
alpha 790-129-9130 50 g minutes).
container
201 ● Used mainly for adhesion of rubbers, plas-
tics and metals.
● Features: Resistance to heat, chemicals
Loctite Polyethylene
79A-129-9110 50 cc ● Used at joint portions subject to high tem-
648-50 container
perature.
● Used as adhesive or sealant for gaskets and
LG-1 790-129-9010 200 g Tube
packing of power train case, etc.
● Features: Resistance to heat
Gasket seal- ● Used as sealant for flange surfaces and bolts
ant at high temperature locations; used to pre-
LG-3 790-129-9070 1 kg Can vent seizure.
● Used as sealant for heat resistant gasket for
at high temperature locations such as engine
pre-combustion chamber, exhaust pipe.
00-8 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD COATING MATERIALS
Category Code Part No. Quantity Container Main applications, features

● Features: Resistance to water, oil
● Used as sealant for flange surface, thread.
● Also possible to use as sealant for flanges
LG-4 790-129-9020 200 g Tube
with large clearance.
● Used as sealant for mating surfaces of final
drive case, transmission case.
● Used as sealant for various threads, pipe
Polyethylene joints, flanges.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg
container ● Used as sealant for tapered plugs, elbows,
nipples of hydraulic piping.
Gasket seal- ● Features: Silicon based, resistant to heat,
ant cold.
LG-6 09940-00011 250 g Tube ● Used as sealant for flange surface, thread.
● Used as sealant for oil pan, final drive case,
etc.
● Features: Silicon based, quick hardening
type.
LG-7 09920-00150 150 g Tube
● Used as sealant for flywheel housing, intake
manifold, oil pan, thermostat housing, etc.
Three
● Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing
bond 790-129-9090 100 g Tube
engines.
1211
● Used as lubricant for sliding parts (to pre-
LM-G 09940-00051 60 g Can
Molybdenum
vent squeaking).
disulphide
lubricant
● Used to prevent seizure or scuffing of the

LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube thread when press fitting or shrink fitting.
● Used as lubricant for linkage, bearings, etc.
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
G2-LI SYG2-400LI-A Various Various ● General purpose type
SYG2-160LI
SYGA160CNLI
SYG2-400CA
SYG2-350CA
● Used for normal temperature, light load
SYG2-400CA-A
G2-CA Various Various bearing at places in contact with water or
Grease SYG2-160CA
steam.
SYG2-
160CNCA
disulphide lubricant
Molybdenum
400 g (10 per

SYG2-400M Belows type ● Used for places with heavy load.
case)
00-9 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE
12
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE 00
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE OF BOLTS AND NUTS 00
The following charts give the standard tightening torques of bolts and nuts. Exceptions are given in DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY.
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats
mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 13.2 ±1.4 1.35 ±0.15
8 13 31.4 ±2.9 3.20 ±0.3
10 17 65.7 ±6.8 6.70 ±0.7
12 19 112 ±9.8 11.5 ±1.0
14 22 177 ±19 18 ±2.0
16 24 279 ±29 28.5 ±3
18 27 383 ±39 39 ±4
20 30 549 ±58 56 ±6
22 32 745 ±78 76 ±8
24 36 927 ±98 94.5 ±10
27 41 1320 ±140 135 ±15
30 46 1720 ±190 175 ±20
33 50 2210 ±240 225 ±25
36 55 2750 ±290 280 ±30
39 60 3280 ±340 335 ±35
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats
mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 7.85 ± 1.95 0.8 ± 0.2
8 13 18.6 ± 4.9 1.9 ± 0.5
10 14 40.2 ± 5.9 4.1 ± 0.6
12 27 82.35 ± 7.85 8.4 ± 0.8
00-10 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE
12
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF HOSE NUTS 00
Use these torques for hose nuts.

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
Nominal No.
mm mm Nm kgm
02 14 19 24.5 ± 4.9 2.5 ± 0.5
03 18 24 49 ± 19.6 5±2
04 22 27 78.5 ± 19.6 8±2
05 24 32 137.3 ± 29.4 14 ± 3
06 30 36 176.5 ± 29.4 18 ± 3
10 33 41 196.1 ± 49 20 ± 5
12 36 46 245.2 ± 49 25 ± 5
14 42 55 294.2 ± 49 30 ± 5
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF SPLIT FLANGE BOLTS 00
Use these torques for split flange bolts.

mm mm Nm kgm
10 14 65.7 ± 6.8 6.7 ± 0.7
12 17 112 ± 9.8 11.5 ± 1
16 22 279 ± 29 28.5 ± 3
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FLARED NUTS 00
Use these torques for flared part of nut.

mm mm Nm kgm
14 19 24.5 ±4.9 2.5 ±0.5
18 24 49 ±19.6 5 ±2
22 27 78.5 ±19.6 8 ±2
24 32 137.3 ±29.4 14 ±3
30 36 176.5 ±29.4 18 ±3
33 41 196.1 ±49 20 ±5
36 46 245.2 ±49 25 ±5
42 55 294.2 ±49 30 ±5
00-11 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD ELECTRIC WIRE CODE
12
ELECTRIC WIRE CODE 00
In the wiring diagrams, various colors and symbols are employed to indicate the thickness of wires. This wire code table will
help you understand WIRING DIAGRAMS.
Example: 05WB indicates a cable having a nominal number 05 and white coating with black stripe.
CLASSIFICATION BY THICKNESS 00
Copper wire
Nominal num- Cable O.D. Current rat-
Number of Dia. Of strand Cross section Applicable circuit
ber (mm) ing (A)
strands (mm) (mm)
0.85 11 0.32 0.88 2.4 12 Starting, lighting, signal etc.
2 26 0.32 2.09 3.1 20 Lighting, signal etc.
5 65 0.32 5.23 4.6 37 Charging and signal
15 84 0.45 13.36 7.0 59 Starting (Glow plug)
40 85 0.80 42.73 11.4 135 Starting
60 127 0.80 63.84 13.6 178 Starting
100 217 0.80 109.1 17.6 230 Starting
CLASSIFICATION BY COLOR AND CODE 00
Circuits
Priority Classi- Charging Ground Starting Lighting Instrument Signal Other
fication
Code W B B R Y G L
Primary
1
Color White Black Black Red Yellow Green Blue
Code WR — BW RW YR GW LW
2 White & Black & Red & Yellow & Green & Blue &
Color —
Red White White Red White White
Code WB — BY RB YB GR LR
3 White & Black & Yel- Yellow & Green &
Color — Red & Black Blue & Red
Black low Black Red
Code WL — BR RY YG GY LY
Auxiliary
4 White & Red & Yel- Yellow & Green & Blue & Yel-
Color — Black & Red
Blue low Green Yellow low
Code WG — — RG YL GB LB
5 White & Red & Yellow & Green & Blue &
Color — —
Green Green Blue Black Black
Code — — — RL YW GL —
6 Yellow & Green &
Color — — — Red & Blue —
White Blue
00-12 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12
CONVERSION TABLES 00
METHOD OF USING THE CONVERSION TABLE 00
The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the method of using the
Conversion Table, see the example given below.
EXAMPLE
● Method of using the Conversion Table to convert from millimeters to inches.
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.
A. Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as 1, then draw a horizontal line from 1.
B. Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as 2, then draw a perpendicular line down from 2.
C. Take the point where the two lines cross as 3. This point 3 gives the value when converting from millimeters to
inches. Therefore, 55 millimeters = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.

A. The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide by 10 (move the decimal one place to the left) to convert it to
55 mm.
B. Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.
C. The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal one place to the
right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.
2
Millimeters to inches 1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
3
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
1
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
00-13 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Millimeters to Inches 1 mm = 0.03937 in

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
Kilogram to Pound 1 kg = 2.2046 lb

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84
10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03
50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26
00-14 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Liter to U.S. Gallon 1 L = 0.2642 U.S. Gal

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378
10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944
50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153
Liter to U.K. Gallon 1 L = 0.21997 U.K. Gal

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980
10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778
50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777
00-15 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
kgm to ft. lb. 1 kgm = 7.233 ft. lb.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1
10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4
50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1
100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7
150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.63 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4
00-16 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
kg/cm2 to lb/in2 1 kg/cm2 = 14.2233lb/in2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0
10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9
50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1010 1024 1038 1053 1067 1081 1095 1109 1124
80 1138 1152 1166 1181 1195 1209 1223 1237 1252 1266
90 1280 1294 1309 1323 1337 1351 1365 1380 1394 1408
100 1422 1437 1451 1465 1479 1493 1508 1522 1536 1550
110 1565 1579 1593 1607 1621 1636 1650 1664 1678 1693
120 1707 1721 1735 1749 1764 1778 1792 1806 1821 1835
130 1849 1863 1877 1892 1906 1920 19324 1949 1963 1977
140 1991 2005 2034 2048 2062 2077 2091 2105 2119
150 2134 2148 2162 2176 2190 2205 2219 2233 2247 2262
160 2276 2290 2304 2318 2333 2347 2361 2375 2389 2404
170 2418 2432 2446 2460 2475 2489 2503 2518 2532 2546
180 2560 2574 2589 2603 2617 2631 2646 2660 2674 2688
190 2702 2717 2731 2745 2759 2773 2788 2802 2816 2830
200 2845 2859 2873 2887 2901 2916 2930 2944 2958 2973
210 2987 3001 3015 3030 3044 3058 3072 3086 3101 3115
220 3129 3143 3158 3172 3186 3200 3214 3229 3243 3257
230 3271 3286 3300 3314 3328 3343 3357 3371 3385 3399
240 3414 3428 3442 3456 3470 3485 3499 3513 3527 3542
00-17 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Temperature
Fahrenheit Centigrade Conversion; a simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centigrade temperature
reading or vise versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center or boldface column of figures. These figures refer to the
temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees. If it is desired to convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, con-
sider the center column as a table of Fahrenheit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column
at the left. If it is desired to convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column as a table of Centigrade
values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
-40.4 -40 -40.0 -11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 117.8
-37.2 .35 -31.0 -11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
-34.4 -30 -22.0 -10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
-31.7 -25 -13.0 -10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
-28.9 -20 -4.0 -9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0
-28.3 -19 -2.2 -8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8

-27.8 -18 -0.4 -8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
-27.2 -17 1.4 -7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
-26.7 -16 3.2 -7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
-26.1 -15 5.0 -6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0
-25.6 -14 6.8 -6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8

-25.0 -13 8.6 -5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
-24.4 -12 10.4 -5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
-23.9 -11 12.2 -4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
-23.3 -10 14.0 -3.9 25 77.0 15.6 60 140.0 35.0 95 203.0
-22.8 -9 15.8 -3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8

-22.2 -8 17.6 -2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
-21.7 -7 19.4 -2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
-21.1 -6 21.2 -1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
-20.6 -5 23.0 -1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0
-20.0 -4 24.8 -0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0

-19.4 -3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
-18.9 -2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
-18.3 -1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
-17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0
-17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0

-16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
-16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
-15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
-15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0
-14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0

-13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
-13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
-12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
-12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0
00-18 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
12
POWER TRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 3 SPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . 10-63
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 6 SPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
DIAGRAM OF THE POWER TRAIN 10-5 7 SPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
HYDRAULIC CONVERTOR- FOR TELESCOPIC ARM . . . . . . 10-68
TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT FOR HAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 8 SPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
DRIVE SHAFTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 FOR HAMMER AND
FORWARD AND REVERSE . . . 10-15 TELESCOPE ARM . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
DRIVEN GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 CLSS (CLOSED CENTER LOAD
4WD DRIVEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 SENSING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK . . . . . . 10-17 CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
FINAL REDUCTION - JOINT . . . . . 10-20 UNLOADING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
STEERING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 INTRODUCTION OF THE LS
FINAL REDUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 DELIVERY COMPENSATION . . . . 10-79
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
PUMP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 LIFD CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 10-82
CONTROL OF DELIVERY . . . . 10-38 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
PC VALVE, LS VALVE, SERVO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
PISTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 LS DECOMPRESSION VALVE . . . . 10-83
LS VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
PC VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
WORKING MODE SOLENOID PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE . . . . 10-84
VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 PRIORITY VALVE (ONLY FOR
STEERING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 THE 2-3 SPOOL CONTROL
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 VALVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
SHOVEL CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . 10-55 SOLENOID VALVE BLOCK ST1 -
2 SPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING -
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-1

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION TABLE OF CONTENTS
BACKHOE BOOM LOCKING. . . . . 10-86

SAFETY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
BRAKE PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
SHOVEL CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
RAISE CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
DUMP CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
BACKHOE CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
BOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
OUTRIGGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
BOOM SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
TELESCOPIC ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . 10-96
FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT . . . . 10-98
SWING BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
BACKHOE WORKING EQUIPMENT 10-101
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT . . . . . . . . 10-103
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
10-2 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION POWER TRAIN
12
POWER TRAIN
DESCRIPTION
● The driving power for the engine (1) is transmitted through the flywheel to the converter (2). The converter (2) uses
hydraulic oil to convert the torque transmitted by the engine (1) into driving power. The converter (2) transmits motion to
the drive shaft of the transmission (3) and to the drive shaft of the hydraulic pump (4).
● The transmission (3) has two hydraulically actuated clutches that can be selected by an electrically controlled gear selec-
tor. It also has a manual gear selection (four forward gears and four reverse gears).
● The driving power is transmitted from the transmission flanges (3) to the front (5) and rear (6) axles through the drive
shafts (7 and 8).
● The driving power transmitted to the front (5) and rear (6) axles is reduced by the differentials and then transmitted to the
planetary gear through the differential shafts.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-3

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION POWER TRAIN
12
Front axle Rear axle
Gears
Transmission Differential Planetary Total Transmission Differential Planetary Total
1st gear 4.280 61.238 5.350 91.362
2nd gear 2.372 33.939 2.965 50.633
2.385 6.000 2.846 6.000
3rd gear 1.239 17.685 1.544 26.367
4th gear 0.662 9.472 0.827 14.123
1. Engine 5. Front axle 9. Rear wheels
2. Convertor 6. Rear axle 10. Front wheels
3. Transmission 7. Front drive shaft
4. Hydraulic pump 8. Rear drive shaft
10-4 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIAGRAM OF THE POWER TRAIN
1. Engine 6. Hydraulic pump
2. Convertor 7. Rear flange

3. Forward clutch 8. 4WD engagement device
4. Transmission 9. Front flange
5. Reverse clutch 10.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-5

HYDRAULIC CONVERTOR-TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. Convertor pressurization valve 6. Reverse clutch 11. 4WD engagement device

2. Convertor 7. Maximum pressure valve 12. Check valve
3. Engine 8. Spin on filter (15 µm) 13. Pressure control
4. Oil cooler 9. Pump 14. 4WD engagement solenoid

5. Forward clutch 10. Suction filter (250 µm) 15. Control valve group
10-6 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Gear lever 5. Suction filter a. From the oil cooler
6. Y5 Reverse gear command

2. Convertor b. To the oil cooler
solenoid
7. Y4 Forward gear command c. To the solenoid valve group

3. Filter
solenoid ST1 (Port P)
d. From the solenoid valve group
4. Oil temperature sensor 8. Y2 4WD command solenoid
ST1 (Port T)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-7

12
10-8 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Hydraulic pump drive shaft 7. Flange 13. 4WD engagement device
2. Propeller shaft 8. 3rd gear driven gear 14. Front output shaft
3. Reverse gear command clutch 9. 4th gear driven gear 15. Flange
4. Forward gear command clutch 10. 4WD drive gear 16. 2nd gear driven gear
5. Reverse gear idler shaft 11. 1st gear driven gear 17. Rear output shaft
6. Drive shaft 12. 4WD driven gear
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-9

12
10-10 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
7. 3rd and 4th gear selector pis-

1. Gear shift piston 13. Spin on filter (15 µm)
ton
2. Spring 8. 1st and 2nd gear selecting fork 14. Valve
3. Spring 9. 4th gear selecting sensor 15. Spring

4. Ball 10. 3rd and 4th gear selecting fork 16. Spring
5. 3rd and 4th selecting fork 11. 1st and 2nd gear selecting fork 17. Spring
6. 1st and 2nd gear selector pis-

12. Suction filter (250 µm)
ton
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-11

10-12 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-13

12
10-14 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
DRIVE SHAFTS
FORWARD AND REVERSE
a. Port reverse clutch 1. Reverse gear clutch (Z=29) 4. Reverse clutch piston
b. Port forward clutch 2. Forward gear clutch (Z=29) 5. Thrust ring
c. Lubrication port 3. Forward clutch piston 6. Driven shaft
DRIVEN GEAR
1. Driven gear for 2nd gear (Z=43) 5. Driven gear for 3rd gear (Z=33)
2. Driven gear for 1st gear (Z=49) 6. Rear output shaft
3. 4WD drive gear (Z=45) 7. Thrust ring
4. Driven gear for 4th gear (Z=24) 8. Synchronizer
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-15

4WD DRIVEN
a. 4WD disengagement port 1. Front output shaft 4. Cylinder
2. 4WD driven gear (Z=36) 5. Spring
3. Thrust ring 6. Disc
10-16 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK
1. Ball 9. Valve
2. Spring 10. Rod

3. Piston 11. Spring
4. Spring 12. Spool return spring
5. Spring 13. Spool

6. Spring guide pin 14. Forward gear solenoid
7. Valve 15. Reverse gear solenoid
8. Spring
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-17

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION FRONT AXLE
12
FRONT AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL
1. Planetary gear 10. Seal
2. Ring Bevel gear (Z=31) 11. Flange
3. Bevel gear 12. Cover

4. Lock nut 13. Lock nut
5. Half axle 14. Bearing
6. Pin 15. Bevel pinion (Z=13)

7. Differential housing 16. Pin
8. Spacer 17. Oil drain plug
9. Bearing
10-18 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
No Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard clear-
Clearance Limit
1 Axle clearance ance
— —
2 Backlash of crown wheel and pinion 0.17 - 0.23 0.23 Adjust
3 Pinion preload (without seal ring) 92 - 137 cNm
Pinion crown wheel preload (without
4 95.9 - 142.9 cNm
seal ring)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-19

12
FINAL REDUCTION - JOINT
1. Planetary carrier 13. Bearing
2. Planetary (Z=29) 14. Joint

3. Ring gear (Z=75) 15. Pin
4. Ring gear carrier 16. Protection
5. Wheel hub 17. Seal
6. Seal 18. Bearing
7. Pin 19. Snap ring
8. Shim 20. Steady pin

9. Protection 21. Stud bolt
10. Bushing 22. Plug
11. Seal 23. Sun gear (Z=15)

12. Axle body 24. Snap ring
10-20 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
1 Hub rotation torque — Adjust
2 Drive shaft axle clearance — Replace
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-21

STEERING CYLINDER
10-22 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
No Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Replace
Clearance between size Shaft Hole clearance limit
1 bushing
bushing and pin + 0.04
50 — 50.19 — — and pin
0
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-23

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION REAR AXLE
12
REAR AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL
1. Bearing 9. Bearing
2. Planetary gear 10. Nut
3. Bevel gear 11. Seal

4. Ring bevel gear (Z=37) 12. Flange
5. DIfferential housing 13. Spacer
6. Lock nut 14. Bevel pinion (Z=13)

7. Half axle 15. Differential housing
8. Pin
10-24 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
Standard clearance Clearance limit
1 Axle clearance
— —
2 Backlash of crown wheel and pinion 0.17 - 0.23 0.23
Adjust
3 Pinion preload (without seal ring) 92 - 138 cNm
Pinion crown wheel preload (without
4 95.23 - 141.84 cNm
seal ring)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-25

12
FINAL REDUCTION
1. Planetary gear carrier 9. Half axle
2. Stud bolt 10. Planetary gear (Z=15)

3. Wheel hub 11. Bushing
4. Planetary gears (Z=28) 12. Snap ring
5. Ring bevel gear carrier 13. Ring gear (Z=75)
6. Bearing 14. Oil plug
7. Seal 15. Steady pin
8. Joint 16. Pin
10-26 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
1 Hub rotation torque — Adjust
2 Drive shaft axle clearance — Replace
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-27

12
BRAKES
1. Bushing 6. Brake disk
2. Parking brake control rod 7. Piston
3. Bleeder valve 8. Spring
4. Parking brake lever 9. Pressure disk

5. Parking brake control cam 10. Intermediate disk
10-28 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
Standard size Repair limit
Installed Replace if
Free Installed Installed Free
1 Brake disc return spring load on damaged
installed length load installed
screw or
27 13 127 Nm 21 10 Nm deformed
2 Disc return spring 35 19 369 Nm 21 10 Nm
Standard thickness Minimum thickness
3 Disc thickness 0 Replace
5 3.3
– 0.15
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-29

DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING
a. From the solenoid valve block ST1 (Port 2)
1. Sleeve
2. Pin
3. Control rod
4. Spacer
5. Fork
6. Piston
7. Cover
8. Snap ring
10-30 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
HYDRAULIC PUMP
1. Delivery variation group a. Port L - To the hydraulic oil tank
2. Y1 solenoid valve working mode b. Port s - To the hydraulic oil tank
3. Delivery control valve c. Port X2 - From the shovel control valve (Port LS)
d. Port B - To the shovel control valve (Port P)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-31

1. Seal 7. Positioning piston

2. Bearing 8. Spring
3. Central spring 9. Cylinder block
4. Bearing 10. Positioning piston

5. Control rod 11. Piston
6. Swash plate 12. Guide shoe
10-32 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
1 Ball bearing loading 0 - 0.05 Adjust
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Backlash between pis-
2 size Shaft Hole clearance limit
ton and cylinder
20 — 0.065
Backlash between pis-
3 0.15
ton and shoe
Standard value Maximum value
4 Drive shaft diameter
34.91
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
5 Spring
installed length load installed load
— 88.7 276 ± 12 N
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-33

Power Governor LS Valve
1. Spring 11. External spring
2. Piston rod 12. Internal spring
3. Bushing 13. Throttles
4. Initial adjustment spring 14. Throttles
5. Pressure cut calibration spring 15. Spool
6. Pressure cut calibration screw
7. Initial adjustment calibration

screw
PC Valve
8. Spool
9. Spring (internal)
10. Spring (external)
10-34 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
Unit: mm
Free Installed Free Installed
1 Spring Installed load
installed length installed load
— — — — —
Power regulation spring
2 125.4 ± 10 N
(external)
Power regulation spring
3 180.2 ± 12.5 N
(internal)
4 PC valve spring (external) 40.2 ± 2.8 N
5 PC valve spring (internal) 81.7 ± 14.5 N
6 LS valve spring (external) 81.7 ± 14.5 N
7 LS valve spring (internal) 40.2 ± 2.8 N
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-35

12
FUNCTION
● The rotation and torque transmitted to the pump shaft is converted into hydraulic energy and pressurized oil is delivered
according to load requirements.
● The amount of oil delivered can be modified by changing the angle of the swash plate.
STRUCTURE
● The cylinder block (6) is supported and connected to the shaft (1) by the spline (a) and the shaft (1) is supported by the
front and rear bearings.
● The tip of the piston (6) is ball-shaped. The shoe (4) is caulked to it to form one unit in such a way that the piston (5) and
the shoe (4) together form a spherical bearing
● The swash plate (3) has a flat surface (A) and the shoe (4) remains pressed against this surface while sliding this surface
while sliding in a circular movement. The swash plate brings highly pressurized oil onto the cylindrical surface (B) fash-
ioned in the pump body (2), which means that the swash plate (3) slides on a hydrostatically-supported bearing.
● The pistons (5) performed their relative movements in an axial direction, inside cylindrical chambers fashioned in the cyl-
inder block (6).
● The oil is brought up to pressure in the chambers of the cylinder block (6) by the rotatory movement of the block itself.
The areas of pressure and suction are determined by the swash plate (7). The surface of the swash plate is so designed that
the oil pressure always remains within acceptable limits. The oil chamber is drawn in and discharged through holes in the
valve plate (7).
10-36 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
OPERATION
PUMP OPERATION
1. The cylinder block (7) rotates together with the shaft (1)
and the shoe (4) slides on the flat surface A. The swash
plate (3) moves along the cylindrical surface B. The angle
formed be-tween the center line of the shaft (1) and the
center line X of the swash plate (3) changes, thus modify-
ing the axial position of the pistons in relation to the cylin-
der block. The angle is known as the swash plate angle.
2. When the center line X of the swash plate (3) maintains the
angle in relation to the center line of the shaft (1), and
hence also of the cylinder block (6), the flat surface A acts
as a cam for the shoe (4). As the piston (5) rotates and
slides inside the cylinder block (6), it therefore creates a
difference between the volumes C and D which provokes
intake and discharge of the oil in quantities equal to the dif-
ference be-tween the volumes (D – C=delivery). In other
words, as the cylinder block (6) rotates, chamber D loses
volume while the volume of chamber C is increased, thus
provoking an in-take of oil. (The figure indicates the state
of the pump when the intake of chamber D and the delivery
of chamber C have been completed).
3. When the center line X of the swash plate (3) and the center
line of the cylinder block (6) are perfectly aligned (the
swash plate angle =0),the difference between the volumes
C and D within the cylinder block (6) becomes 0 and the
pump does not take in or deliver any oil. (In practice the
swash plate angle never =0)
4. In other words, pump delivery is directly proportional to

the swash plate angle.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-37

12
CONTROL OF DELIVERY
1. As the swash plate angle grows larger, the difference

between volumes C and D increases, and the delivery Q
also increases. The swash plate angle is modified by
servo-pistons (8) and (9).
2. The servo-piston (8) moves in a reciprocating linear

motion caused by pressure signals from the PC and LS
valves. The linear movement is transmitted to the swash
plate (3), which is supported by the cylindrical surface of
the cradle (2). The swash plate therefore has a semi-cir-
cular reciprocating movement.
3. The surfaces of the servo-pistons receiving the pressures

PP and LS are dissimilar. The delivery pressure PP of the
main pump is always passed into the smaller (upper)
pressure chamber, whereas the pressure PEN coming
from the LS valve is passed into the larger (lower) pres-
sure chamber. The movement of the servo-piston is gov-
erned by the relationship between pressures PP and PEN,
as well by the proportions between the surfaces (larger
and smaller) of the servo-piston.
10-38 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
PC VALVE, LS VALVE, SERVO PISTON
Servo Piston PC Valve
1. Spring 6. Servo piston

2. Servo piston 7. Spring
3. Servo piston
LS Valve
4. Piston
5. Spring
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-39

12
LS VALVE
FUNCTION
● The LS valve controls the pump delivery according to the stroke of the control valve level, i.e., in function of the delivery
demands made by the actuators.
● The LS valve detects the actuator’s delivery needs by means of the differential pressure PLS existing between the pump
delivery pressure PP and the pressure PLS coming from the control valve. This reading permits control of the main pump
delivery Q. (PP, PLS and PLS are, respectively, the pump pressure, the Load Sensing pressure, and the difference in pres-
sure between these two values).
● In other words, the LS valve detects the pressure difference PLS generated by the passage of the oil flow through the sur-
face freed by the control valve spool, and controls the pump delivery Q so as to keep the pressure drop constant. It can
therefore be assumed that the pump delivery is proportional to the demands made known by the control valve.
10-40 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
OPERATION
1. When the control valve is in a NEUTRAL position
● The pressure PLS of the LS coming from the control valve outlet passes into chamber a of the spring of the LS valve. The
pressure PP of the pump passes into chamber b of the opposite side.
● The piston rod movement (4) is determined by the combination of the force generated by the pressure PLS, the force of
the spring (6) and the force generated on the side opposite the piston rod by the pressure PP.
● Before the engine is started the servo-piston (3) is pushed to the right by the spring (1) (corresponding to the maximum
angle of the swash plate).
● If all the control valve spools are in their NEUTRAL position when the engine is started, the pressure PLS of the LS will
remain at 600 ± 200 kPa because no oil is flowing through the control valve. At the same time the pump pressure PP
increases and is maintained at a value of about 2.7 MPa.
● For this reason the piston (4) is thrust to the right and a passage is formed between the delivery lines c and d. This opening
enables the pump pressure PP to enter chamber X of the servo-piston (3). Although the pump pressure PP is always
passed into chamber Y of the servo-piston (2), since the force exerted by that pressure on piston (3) exceeds the force
exerted on piston (2), the servo-piston (1) moves to the right, i.e. towards the side of the minimum angle of the swash plate
2 when a control valve lever is activated
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-41

12
2. When a control valve lever is activated
● When the control valve lever is moved out of its NEUTRAL position, the opening f is created, allowing an LS signal to be
generated.
● Until the PLS generates a force less than the force exerted by the spring (6) on the spool (4), the system will remain stable.
When the opening f is such as to provoke a reduction in PLS, the spool (4) moves to the left to form a passage between
delivery lines d and e. The chamber X loses pressure and the servo-piston causes the swash plate to move towards maxi-
mum displacement.
● Equilibrium is re-established in the system when the pressure PLS generates on the spool (4) the difference in force
exerted by the spring (6), and the passage between delivery lines c and d is reopened.
10-42 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
3. When the control valve opening is at its maximum (lever at the end of its stroke)
● When the control lever is moved to full stroke, in other words, when the spool opening reaches its maximum, the differ-
ence between the pump pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS becomes smaller (differential pressure PLS).
● The LS pressure PL introduced into the chamber a of the LS valve becomes about the same as the pump pressure PP and
the piston (4) is moved to the left by the combined forces generated by the pressure PLS and the spring (6). The piston
movement closes the delivery line c and forms a passage between lines d and e.
● The pressurized oil present in the chamber X of the servo-cylinder (3) flows through the lines d and e and reaches the
pump drainage chamber, so that the pressure in chamber X of the servo-cylinder (1) becomes equal to the drainage pres-
sure.
● The servo-piston (3) is thus moved to the right by swash plate movement due to the pressure PP in the chamber Y of the
servo cylinder (2). In other words, it is drawn in the direction of the increase in angle of the swash plate.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-43

12
4. When the spool makes very small movements (fine-control)
● When the control valve lever moves in very small increments towards the NEUTRAL position, i.e.when the control valve
opening f diminishes, the differential pressure PLS between the pump pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS increases.
● If the differential pressure PLS generates on the spool (4) a difference in force that exceeds the force exerted by the spring
(6), the spool moves to the right and a passage is formed between the delivery lines c and d. The pressure PP is introduced
into the chamber X and the swash plate moves towards its minimum angle.
● When the control valve lever performs small movements towards the position of maximum opening, i.e. when the opening
f of the control valve increases, the differential pressure PLS diminishes.
● If the differential pressure PLS generates on the spool (4) a force difference that does not exceed the force exerted by the
spring (6), the spool (4) moves to the left and a passage is formed between the delivery lines d and e. The chamber X loses
pressure and the servo piston provokes a movement of the swash plate towards maximum displacement.
● Equilibrium is re-established in the system when the pressure PLS generates on the spool (4) the difference in force
exerted by the spring (6), and hence the passage between delivery lines c and d is also reopened.
10-44 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
5. When pump flow matches the demands of the control valve
● Let A1 be the surface of the servo-piston (3), A2 the surface of the servo-piston (2), PEN the pressure acting on the piston
(1) and PP the pressure acting on the piston side (2).
● When pump delivery reaches the quantity demanded by the control valve, the pump pressure PP in chamber b of the LS
valve is in equilibrium with the combined forces of the LS pressure PLS in chamber a, and the force exerted by the spring
(6). Once equilibrium has been reached the piston (4) stops in the central position.
● In this condition the passage from chamber c to chamber d remains only slightly open in order to maintain pressure in
chamber d. A flow of oil is introduced into the servo-cylinder (3) at a pressure that balances the force generated by the
pump pressure PP in the cylinder (2). (PEN x A1=PP x A2)
● The stability of the equilibrium is guaranteed by a flow stabilized by the throttle g.
● The force of the spring (6) is regulated so that the piston (4) is in equilibrium when PP – PLS = 1.8 MPa.
● In practice, the pump flow is made proportional to the section of the opening of the control valve, which maintains the
differential pressure PLS = 1.8 MPa.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-45

12
PC VALVE
FUNCTION
● The PC valve performs an approximate power

check, and ensures that the hydraulic horse-power
absorbed by the pump does not exceed the horse-
power delivered by the endothermal engine. This is
achieved by limiting the pump delivery Q in func-
tion of the delivery pressure PP, even if the LS valve
requests an increase in delivery Q due to the larger
section freed by the control valve spool, in the pres-
ence of high pressure pump delivery.
● In other words, when during operation the delivery
Q increases and the delivery pressure PP also
increases simultaneously, the PC valve reduces the
pump delivery Q. When the delivery pressure PP
decreases, the PC valve increases the pump flow.
● The relationships between the pump delivery pres-
sure PP and the delivery Q are shown in the dia-
gram.
10-46 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
OPERATION
1. When the load on the actuators is heavy (high pump delivery pressure)
● When a higher delivery is required, the LS valve receives a signal from the control valve to bring the pump up to maxi-
mum displacement. When the swash plate moves it also moves the bushing (2) joined to it (by the pin (1)), which releases
the spring (3).
● As the pressure of the actuators increases, pressure also increases in the delivery line c. When the calibrated setting of the
spring (3) is reached, the piston rod (4) is thrust to the left and the passage between chamber b and the pump drainage
chamber a is opened.
● The opening of the passage between the chambers b and a generates a flow of oil and due to the calibrated hole (6), a pres-
sure P is generated between chambers f and g at the sides opposite the spool (5).(P =PP– PPC)
● When the value of PP exceeds the value of the spring loading (7) the spool (5) moves to the right opening the passage
between the delivery lines d and e and sending the pump pressure PP towards the servo-cylinder (8).
● The pressure PP introduced into chamber X of the cylinder (8) pushes it towards the minimum angle of the swashplate.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-47

2. When equilibrium has been reached
● When the piston (8) is pushed to the left the bushing (2) is also moved. The oil flow between the chambers b and a is re-
duced and the PPC pressure tends to approach the PP pressure value. The P decreases and the spool (5) is pushed to the
left by the force of the spring (7).
● Equilibriums reached when the force generated by the PP pressure, the force generated by the PPC pressure, and the force
of the spring (7) are all balanced. (The force generated by PP = the force generated by the PPC + the spring force (7))
● In this condition the passage from chamber d to chamber e remains only slightly open in order to maintain pressure in
chamber e. A flow of oil is introduced into the cylinder (8) at a pressure that balances the force generated by the pump
pressure PP acting on the cylinder (9). (PEN x A1 =PP x A2)
● The stability of this equilibrium is generated by a continuous stabilized flow from the throttle (10).
10-48 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
3. When the load on the actuators decreases (pump delivery pressure drops
● When the load on the actuators diminishes and the pump delivery pressure PP drops, the PPC pressure also drops.
● The reduction in the PPC causes the spool (4) to move and the passage between chambers b, d and a is closed. The PPC
pressure and the PP pressure of the pump are equalized due to the interruption of the oil flow through the calibrated hole
(6) and P becomes zero (P =PP– PPC=0).
● The spring (7) pushes the spool (5) to the left closing the passage between the chambers d and e and opening the passage
between chambers e and g.
● The pressurized oil present in chamber X of the servo-cylinder (8) passes through chambers e and g and reaches the pump
drainage chamber, so that the pressure in chamber X of the servo-cylinder (7) becomes equal to the drainage pressure.
● Therefore the servo-piston (7) is caused to move by the PP pressure in chamber Y of the servo-cylinder (9), i.e. in the
direction of the increase in the angle of the swash plate.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-49

4. The function of the spring
● The loading on the springs (3) and (11) of the PC valve

changes in proportion to the angle of inclination of the
pump swash plate.
● The compression of the spring (3) varies with the move-
ments of the servo-piston (8).
● When the piston (8) moves to the left, the spring (3) is
compressed. If the piston (8) moves even further to the left,
the spring (11) comes into action to increase the loading. In
other words, the overall loading of the springs is varied by
the piston (8), which either compresses or releases them.
● The pump absorption torque curve, which indicates the
relationship between the pump delivery pressure PP and
the delivery Q, is a broken line (as illustrated in the dia-
gram).
● The position in which the piston (8) stops, i.e. the pump
absorption torque, is determined by the position in which
the PPC pressure applied to the spool (4) is balanced by the force exerted by the springs (3) and (11).
● In practice, as the pump delivery pressure PP increases, the delivery Q decreases, and as the pressure PP diminishes the
pump delivery Q increases.
10-50 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
WORKING MODE SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION
● Calibration of the pump absorption torque is normally
performed for the working mode E. When the solenoid
valve of the working mode is commutated the
absorbed power of the pump is increased, as indicated
by the working mode curve.
OPERATION
1. WORKING MODE E
● During normal operation (Working mode E), the PC valve intervenes when a P1 is generated equal to the loading on the
spring (4).
● The P1 is generated by the calibrated hole (3) in the spool of the PC valve (2) when, at a determined pump delivery pres-
sure P1, the valve (1) puts the delivery line a into discharge, thus generating a flow in the delivery line a.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-51

12
2. WORKING MODE P
● When the solenoid valve (6) is commutated (Working Mode P) the pressurized oil coming from the pump changes its
route and passes through the throttle (5), which has a larger diameter than the calibrated hole (3).
● Because the throttle (5) has a larger diameter, the P2 generated is less than is needed to overcome the force generated by
the spring (4). The spool of the PC valve (2) is therefore pushed to the left by the force of the spring (4).
● This shift obliges the pump to increase displacement and the delivery. (See PC Valve for details)
● The increase in flow causes an increment of the P2 which, when the loading value of the spring is reached, allows the
spool to shift to the right.
10-52 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION STEERING UNIT
12
STEERING UNIT
a. Port LS - From the shovel control valve (Port DLS)

b. Port T - To the hydraulic oil tank
c. Port L - To the steering cylinder (Port a)
d. Port R - To the steering cylinder (Port b)
e. Port P - From the shovel control valve (Port D)
TECHNICAL DATA
Steering unit type: LAGCSDS160P
Displacement: 160 cc/rev.
OPERATION
● The steering unit is composed of a control valve and a rotating oil dispenser, and is of the hydrostatic type.
● When the steering wheel is turned, the control valve sends oil from the pump P2 (by means of the rotating oil dispenser)
to one of the sides of the steering cylinder. The rotating dispenser ensures that the volume of oil supplied to the cylinder is
proportionate to the angle of rotation of the steering wheel.
● In the event of malfunction, the oil dispenser will function automatically as a hand-pump, thus guaranteeing emergency
steering.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-53

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Refer to section 90
10-54 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SHOVEL CONTROL VALVE
12
SHOVEL CONTROL VALVE
2 SPOOL
a. Port D - To the hydraulic steering unit (Port P) 1. Pressure cut-out valve
b. Port A2 - To the bucket cylinders (Head side) 2. Plug
c. Port A1 - To the shovel raise cylinders (Base side) 3. Ball

d. Port LS - To the pump (Port X2) 4. Spring
e. Port T - To the hydraulic tank 5. Priority valve piston rod
f. Port P - From the pump (Port B) 6. Priority valve spring

g. Port B1 - To the shovel raise cylinder (Head side)
h. Port B2 - To the bucket cylinder (Base side)
i. To the hydraulic steering unit (Port LS)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-55

12
Unit: mm
Free Installed Installed
1 Check valve spring Installed load Free installed
installed length load
2 Priority valve spring
10-56 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Plug 8. Antishock/anticavitation valve
2. Raise spool 9. Bucket dump spool
3. Spool return spring 10. Spool return spring
4. Spring 11. Coil
5. Ball 12. Spring

6. Ball 13. Check valve
7. Compensator
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-57

Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
1 Spool return spring Installed load Free installed
2 Spool locking spring

3 Spool return spring
4 Check valve spring
10-58 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

3 SPOOL
a. Port D - To the hydraulic steering unit (Port P) l. Port B3 - To the auxiliary equipment (Right side)
b. Port A3 - To the auxiliary equipment (Left side) m. Port DLS - To the hydraulic steering unit (Port LS)
c. Port A2 - To the bucket cylinder (Head side) 1. Pressure cut-out valve
d. Port A1 - To the shovel raise cylinder (Base side) 2. Plug

e. Port LS - To the pump (Port X2) 3. Ball
f. Port T - To the hydraulic tank 4. Spring
g. Port P - From the pump (Port B) 5. Priority valve piston rod
h. Port B1 - To the shovel raise cylinder (Head side) 6. Priority valve spring
i. Port B2 - To the bucket cylinders (base side) 7. Plug
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-59

12
Unit: mm
10-60 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Plug 8. Antishock/anticavitation valve
2. Raise spool 9. Bucket dump spool
3. Spool return spring 10. Spool return spring
4. Spring 11. Coil
5. Ball 12. Optional equipment spool
6. Ball 13. Spring

7. Compensator 14. Check valve
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-61

12
Unit: mm
2 Spool locking spring

3 Spool return spring
10-62 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
6 SPOOL
a. Port P - From the pump (Port B) l. Port A5 - To the bucket cylinder (Head side)
b. Port T - To the hydraulic tank m. Port A4 - To the L.H. outrigger cylinder (Head side)
c. Port B1 - To the arm cylinder (Base side) n. Port A3 - To the R.H. outrigger cylinder (Head side)
d. Port B2 - To the arm L.H. swing cylinder (Base side) o. Port A2 - To the R.H Boom swing cylinder (Base side)
e. Port B3 - To the R.H. outrigger cylinder (Base side) p. Port A1 - To the arm cylinder (Head side)
f. Port B4 - To the L.H. outrigger cylinder (Base side) q. Port T1 - To the hydraulic tank
g. Port B5 - To the bucket cylinder (Base side) r. Port LS - To the pump (Port X2)
h. Port B6 - To the boom cylinder (Head side)
i. Port A6 - To the boom cylinder (Base side)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-63

12
Unit: mm
10-64 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Ball 8. Plug
2. Antishock/anticavitation valve 9. Outrigger spool
3. Boom spool 10. Boom swing spool
4. Spool return spring 11. Arm spool
5. Compensator 12. Spring

6. Bucket spool 13. Check valve
7. Anticavitation valve
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-65

12
Unit: mm
10-66 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Valve 4. Pressure cut-out valve
2. Spring 5. Unloading valve

3. Plug
Unit: mm
1 Unloading valve spring Installed load Free installed
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-67

12
7 SPOOL
FOR TELESCOPIC ARM
FOR HAMMER
a. Port B7 - To telescopic arm cylinder (Base side)

b. Port A7 - To telescopic arm cylinder (Head side)
c. Port B7 - To hammer (Left side)
10-68 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
1. Anticavitation valve 5. Compensator
2. Telescopic arm spool 6. Antishock/anticavitation valve
3. Spool return spring 7. Hammer spool
4. Plug
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-69

12
Unit: mm
10-70 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
8 SPOOL
FOR HAMMER AND TELESCOPE ARM
Unit: mm
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-71

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION CLSS (CLOSED CENTER LOAD SENSING SYSTEM
12
CLSS (CLOSED CENTER LOAD SENSING SYSTEM
CHARACTERISTICS
The term CLSS means Closed center load Sensing System, which has the following characteristics:
A. high precision control that is independent of the load applied to the movement;
B. High precision control of digging action even during delicate maneuvers;
C. Ability to perform complex operations, guaranteed by control of oil flow in function of aperture surfaces of the shut-
tles;
D. Energy savings guaranteed by the control of the pump delivery.
STRUCTURE
● The CLSS system includes the variable flow pump, the control valve and the working equipment.
● The pump includes the main pump, the PC valve and the LS valve.
10-72 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
OPERATION
1.Control of the angle of the pumping plate.
● The angle of the swash plate (and hence the pump delivery) is controlled in such a way that the differential pressure PLS
between the delivery pressure PP of the pump and the pressure PLS at the outlet of the control valve towards the actuator
is maintained at a constant value.
● If the differential pressure PLS becomes lower than the set pressure of the LS valve, the angle of the swash plate increases
(delivery increasing). If the differential pressure PLS increases, the angle of the swash plate decreases.
★ For details about this movement, see the description of the Hydraulic Pump.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-73

12
2. Pressure compensation control
● The pressure compensation valves are install downstream from the control valve in order to balance the differential pres-
sure between the loads. When two or more movements (cylinders) are activated simultaneously, the pressure differences
between the delivery at the control valve inlet and outlets of the control valve are compensated by these valves. We obtain
the distribution of the pump flow in proportion to the areas of passage S1 and S2 of each valve.
10-74 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
UNLOADING VALVE
FUNCTION
1. When the control valve is in the NEUTRAL position, the flow Q of the pump (due to the swash plate being in the mini-
mum angle position) is sent to the control valve. In these conditions, the pump delivery pressure PP is regulated to 2.7
MPa by the spring (2) inside the valve. (PP=PLS + spring load with PLS=600 kPa)
OPERATION
When the control is in NEUTRAL position
● On the two surfaces of the shuttle (1), the pump pressure PP acts on the right-hand side, while the LS signal with pressure
PLS acts on the left-hand side.
● Because a LS signal is generated with a pressure PS 600 ± 200 kPa, when the control valves in NEUTRAL position, the
pump delivery pressure PP is regulated by the combination of the pressure provided by the spring and the LS pressure
PLS.
● While the pump delivery pressure PP increases until it compensates for the loading on the spring (2) and for the LS pres-
sure 2.7 MPa, the shuttle (1) moves to the left and the PP circuit is put into communication with the tank circuit T.
● This system ensures that the pump delivery pressure PP stays regulated at 2.7 MPa.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-75

12
2. If during the precision regulations of the control valve, the request for oil flow to the actuators in equal or less than the
delivery values given by the minimum angle of the swash plate, the pump delivery pressure PP is regulated by the pres-
sure PLS + 2.1 MPa. Because the unloading valve opens when the differential pressure between the pump delivery pres-
sure PP and the PLS LS pressure becomes equivalent to the loading of the spring (2) (2.1 MPa), the differential LS
pressure PLS LS becomes 2.1 MPa.
Final control of control valve
● When final control are performed with the control valve, a pressure PLS is generated that pressurizing the spring cham-
ber, acts on the left-hand extremity of the valve (1). The actuator pressure is introduced into the LS circuit and then into
the spring chamber. As a result, the pump pressure PP tends to increase.
● When the differential pressure between the pump delivery pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS has the same value as the
loading on the spring (2) (2.1 MPa), the shuttle (1) moves to the left and the pump circuit PP puts itself into communica-
tion with the tank circuit T. Consequently the exceeding pump delivery Q, relative to the actuator request, is sent to the
tank circuit.
● The pump delivery pressure PP is regulated by the combination of the pressure provided by the spring (2.1 MPa) and by
the LS pressure PLS, i.e. when the pressure differential PLS reaches the value of 2.1 MPa.
10-76 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
3. When the request for oil flow from the actuators exceeds the minimum delivery of the pump during use of the control
valve, the connection to the tank circuit is eliminated and the entire pump delivery Q is sent to the actuators.
When the control valve is in use
● When the control valve shuttle is operated to execute a larger stroke, the opening section of the spool becomes larger and
the controlled delivery is larger. Because the control valve passage is large, the difference between the LS pressure PLS
and the pump delivery pressure PP is reduced up to 2.1 MPa (the LS pump valve setting).
● Because the differential pressure between the pump delivery pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS is not equal to the pres-
sure applied by the spring load (2) of 2.4 MPa, the shuttle (1) is pushed to the right.
● The result is the connection between the pump delivery circuit PP and the tank circuit T is excluded and the entire pump
delivery Q is sent to the actuator.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-77

12
INTRODUCTION OF THE LS PRESSURE
● The LS pressure is the pressure generated by external forces acting on the actuators at the outlet of the control valve.
OPERATION
● When the shuttle (1) is activated, the pump pressure PP starts to flow into the actuator circuit through the duct b.
● At the same time the compensator (2) moves up so that the flow controlled by spool (1) can flow towards the actuator A.
(Check valve (4) do not allow any flow before the pressure in chamber c is higher than pressure in chamber b). Pressure
downstream spool (1) flows in the PLS circuit downstream the compensator valve through the orifice d.
● The PLS circuit of the LS is thus in communication with the tank circuit T by means of the LS decompression valve (3).
(See the description of the LS decompression valve).
● The system stabilizes when a pressure difference of 1.8 MPa is generated across the shuttle (1) between pump pressure PP
and PLS pressure.
10-78 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
DELIVERY COMPENSATION
INTRODUCTION
The flow sent to each actuator is controlled by the opening area of each spool.
While performing complex control, in traditional control valves the difference between actuators pressure might cause sudden
and unexpected movements acceleration in those actuators operate at lower pressure. The adoption of the pressure compensa-
tion valve allow to control those situation guaranteeing the proportionality between each actuator.
FUNCTION
Compensation of actuator deliveries occurs when, during the simultaneous activation of two or more movements, the pressure
of one actuator drops lower than that of the other, and pump delivery, if not controlled, tends to be supplied the actuator oper-
ating at lower. (In the diagram the actuator on the left is requesting higher pressure).
OPERATION
1. When activating an actuator at a pressure lower than the one already working. (While operating actuator A starts operating
actuator B)
● Until the pressure PBV downstream from the shuttle (1) reaches the same value requested by actuator B, no oil passes.
● When the pressure requested by actuator B is exceeded, movement can commence. This creates a flow that adding to the
one controlled by spool (3) reduces the pressure upstream of spool (1) and (3) and therefore the P between PLS and PP.
● The pump compares the delivery pressures PP and PLS and senses that the difference P < 1.8 MPa. This variation in P
causes an increase in oil flow increasing the swash plate angle.
● Until the pump does not realize a P of 1.8 MPa, i.e. until the increase in oil flow compensates the requirements of the two
actuators, the pump will continue to increase delivery. When this differential is reached, the system will stabilize.
● The compensator (2) is moved upwards by the oil flow and stops when the aperture between the chambers a and b reduces
the passage sufficiently to reduce the pressure in chamber b to be sent to the actuator.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-79

12
2. When a low pressure actuator needs to work at a higher pressure than the other
● If the actuator B needs to work at a higher pressure (PB>PA), the pressure PB will start to increase.
● Since pressure PB is increasing, the compensator (2) moves upwards to restore the P between the chambers a and b, and
therefore the P does not vary upstream or downstream from the shuttle (1).
● When pressure PB exceeds pressure PA, the compensator (2) is fully open and the pressure PB is introduced into the LS
circuit.
● The increase in pressure in the LS circuit obliges the pump to increase delivery until the P is restored to 1.8 MPa.
● Simultaneously, the increase in pressure upstream from the shuttle (3) generates an increase in P upstream and down-
stream from the shuttle. (PAV<PLS<PP)
● Because the pressure PLS which is equal to the pressure PB acts on the upper side of the compensator (4), and since the
pressure PAV is lower, the compensator (4) is pushed downwards.
● The compensator stops when the aperture between the chambers c and d generates a reduction of the passage sufficient to
reduce the pressure to be sent to the actuator, and to increase the pressure PAV until the P is restored to the 1.8 MPa nec-
essary for equilibrium.
10-80 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
3. When an increase in delivery is required by an actuator
● When an increased delivery is required by actuator A, i.e. when the shuttle (3) is asked to execute a bigger movement, the
section of the aperture increases.
● The increase in aperture provokes a drop in P between the two sides of the shuttles (2) and (3), because the flow, which
has remained unchanged until now, is divided between both the actuators.
● At the same time the pump senses the variation in P and increases the oil flow until the P is restored to P of 1.8 MPa
between the two sides of the shuttle (1) and the compensator (4) changes position in order to restore the P upstream and
downstream from the shuttle (3).
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-81

12
LIFD CONTROL SYSTEM
FUNCTION
● The Load Independence Flow Divider (LIFD) intervenes automatically when the oil-flow requested by the actuators
exceeds the maximum delivery guaranteed by the pump. In this case, the oil-flow is divided between the various actuators
in proportion to their requirements.
OPERATION
● When, during the simultaneous operation of more than one actuator, one of them needs a higher pressure and the charac-
teristics of the pump are exceeded, the pump guarantees a delivery limited by its calibration curve.
● At this point less oil than requested is distributed to all the actuators.
● Because the sections of the apertures remain unchanged, the pressure upstream and downstream from the shuttles drops.
Since the position of the compensator (4) is determined by the pressure of the LS signal, by the pressure PBV downstream
from the shuttle (3) and by the flow of oil needed for the movement, the compensator is pushed downwards by the higher
pressure in the upper chamber until the pressure PBV downstream from the shuttle becomes equal to the pressure PAV
downstream from the shuttle (1). This equalizes the pressure P of the shuttle (1).
● Thus the flow of each actuator is reduced by a percentage equal to the reduction or absence of pump delivery.
● In other words, when the request for performance is excessive, the system can nevertheless guarantee proportionality and
gradually for the movements in any load conditions.
● If an increase in delivery is requested, rather than an increase in pressure, and the characteristics of the pump are
exceeded, the system will function in the same way as described for the above case.
10-82 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
LS DECOMPRESSION VALVE
DESCRIPTION
The LS decompression valve is a throttle that continuously releases a small quantity of oil from the LS circuit and that, when the shuttles are
brought back to a neutral position, releases the residual LS pressure. This continued flow renders the PLS pressure increment more gentle
and gradual, and increases stability and control during the phases of reducing the LS pressure.
OPERATION
● When the LS pressure reaches chamber a of the valve, it generates a force that opposes the force of the spring (2).
● Until the force generated by the LS pressure exceeds the force of the spring (2) (LS pressure low) the shuttle (1) remains
at rest and oil flows through the calibrated orifice b in the tank circuit.
● When the force generated by the LS pressure exceeds the force of the spring (2), the shuttle is pushed upwards and the
passage c are closed. Oil continues to flow into the chamber d until the force generated by the pressure contained in cham-
ber d, together with the force of the spring (2), exceeds the force generated by the LS pressure.
● The shuttle is pushed downwards and passage c is opened.
● The system is in equilibrium (the shuttle is at rest) when the quantity of oil allowed to flow into the tank circuit is equiva-
lent to the quantity that generates a pressure difference P such that (PLSxS)=[(PLS1xS)+F] where: PLS=LS pressure
PLS1=LS pressure contained in chamber d S=section of the shuttle F=force of the spring.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-83

12
PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE
DESCRIPTION
The function of the pressure cut-off valve is to regulate the maximum pressure of the Load Sensing signal and hence also the pressure of the
pump.
OPERATION
● The pressurized oil of the LS reaches the chamber a of the valve.
● When the force generated by the LS pressure on the valve (1) exceeds the force of the spring (2), the valve (1) is pushed
upwards opening the passage between the chamber a and the tank circuit.
10-84 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
PRIORITY VALVE (ONLY FOR THE 2-3 SPOOL CONTROL VALVE)
FUNCTION
The function of the priority valve is to distribute oil to the steering unit and to the other hydraulic components. Distribution is determined by
the position of the valve of the priority valve in function of the LS signal, oil delivery from the pump, the pressure of the steering unit and the
pressure of the hydraulic circuit. The position of the valve is such as to guarantee that delivery to the steering unit will always correspond to
the actual need.
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-85

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SOLENOID VALVE
12
SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE BLOCK ST1 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING - BACKHOE

BOOM LOCKING.
1. EV4 - Backhoe boom locking

2. EV3 - Differential locking
a. Port T - To the transmission
b. Port 1 - Boom-locking cylinder
c. Port 2 - To the rear axle
d. Port P - From the transmission
10-86 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SAFETY VALVE
12
SAFETY VALVE
Shovel raise Arm
a. Port Y - To the raise cylinder (Head side) a. Port Y - To the arm cylinder (Head side)
b. Port A - From shovel control valve (Port A1) b. Port A - From backhoe control valve (Port B1)
c. Port X - To the raise cylinder (Base side) c. Port X - To the arm cylinder (Base side)
d. Port B - From shovel control valve (Port B1) d. Port B - From backhoe control valve (Port A1)
Bucket Dump CHARACTERISTICS
a. Port Y - To the dump cylinder (Head side) Safety valve calibration
b. Port A - From shovel control valve (Port B2) Shovel dump: 23 MPa
c. Port X - To the dump cylinder (Base side) Boom: 35 MPa
d. Port B - From shovel control valve (Port A2) Arm: 23 MPa
Boom
a. Port Y - To the boom cylinder (Head side)

b. Port A - From backhoe control valve (Port A6)
c. Port X - To the boom cylinder (Base side)
d. Port B - From backhoe control valve (Port B6)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-87

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SAFETY VALVE
12
★ The drawing shows boom safety valve
1. Plug 9. Spool
2. Check valve spring 10. Safety valve spring
3. Check valve 11. Safety valve

4. Check valve spring 12. Spool
5. Check valve 13. Spring
6. Plug 14. Housing
7. Protection 15. Plug
8. Over-ride screw (Safety)
10-88 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION BRAKE PUMP
12
BRAKE PUMP
1. Pump body CHARACTERISTICS
2. Main piston Stroke: 36 mm
3. Seal Displacement: 15 - 28 cc
4. Differential piston Maximum pressure: 15 MPa
5. Spring
6. Pump spring
7. Spring
8. Check valve
9. Ball
10. Seal
11. Pin
12. Seal
13. Seal
14. Seal
15. Ball
16. Spring
17. Seal
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-89

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION BRAKE PUMP
12
Unit: mm
1 Ball valve spring Installed load Free installed Replace if
damaged
25 13 20 N 18-22 N
or
2 Spring 21 13 7.3 N 7.3 - 7.8 N deformed
3 Pump spring 91 60 72 N 65 - 79 N
4 Spring 14 7.3 4N 3.6 - 4.4 N
10-90 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SHOVEL CYLINDERS
12
SHOVEL CYLINDERS
RAISE CYLINDER
DUMP CYLINDER
1. Bushing, base side 4. Piston seal 7. Cylinder
2. Cylinder 5. Piston 8. Bushing, head side
3. Nut 6. Piston rod
CHARACTERISTICS Unit: mm
Cylinder Raise Dump
Piston rod diameter 50 50
Internal cylinder diameter 85 85
Piston stroke 730 755
Maximum cylinder length 1880 2145

Minimum cylinder length 1150 1390
Key size for piston safety nut 55 55
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-91

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SHOVEL CYLINDERS
12
RAISE CYLINDER
DUMP CYLINDER
Unit: mm
Criteria
No Check item Cylinder Standard Tolerance Minimum Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole clearance limit
-0.025 +0.064
Tolerance between Raise 50
-0.050 +0.025
0.05 0.114
1 piston rod and cylin- Replace
-0.025 +0.064
der head Dump 50 0.05 0.114
-0.050 +0.025
-0.050 +0.24
Tolerance between Raise 45 0.13 0.329
-0.089 +0.08
2 bushing and piston
-0.050 +0.24
rod mounting pin Dump 45 0.13 0.329 Replace
-0.089 +0.08
pin and
-0.038 +0.24
Tolerance between Raise 50 0.118 0.323 bushing
-0.083 +0.08
3 bushing and cylin-
der mounting pin -0.038 +0.24
Dump 50 0.118 0.323
-0.083 +0.08
10-92 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
BACKHOE CYLINDERS
BOOM
1. Head bushing, piston rod side 5. Piston 9. Bottom bushing
2. Piston rod 6. Piston ring 10. Dowel bolt
3. Cylinder head 7. Guide ring 11. Ball bearings (9)
4. Cylinder 8. Cushion plunger
ARM
1. Head bushing 5. Bushing 9. Nut
2. Piston rod 6. Piston ring 10. Bottom bushing

3. Cylinder head 7. Guide ring
4. Cylinder 8. Piston
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-93

12
BUCKET
1. Head bushing 4. Cylinder 7. Guide ring
2. Piston rod 5. Piston 8. Nut

3. Cylinder head 6. Piston ring 9. Bottom bushing
OUTRIGGERS
1. Piston rod 4. Spacer 7. Piston

2. Cylinder head 5. Piston ring 8. Nut
3. Cylinder 6. Guide ring
10-94 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
BOOM SWING
1. Retaining ring 5. Swing bushing 9. Guide ring
2. Throttling ring 6. Cylinder head 10. Piston ring

3. Piston rod 7. Head bushing 11. Spacer
4. Cylinder 8. Piston 12. Cushion plunger
TELESCOPIC ARM
1. Piston rod 4. Piston 7. Nut
2. Cylinder head 5. Piston ring
3. Cylinder 6. Guide ring
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-95

12
CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Boom Arm
WB150-2N
Cylinder Bucket
WB140-2N WB150-2N WB140-2N WB150-2N (with tele-
scopic arm
Piston rod diameter 60 60 60 60 60 60
Internal cylinder diameter 120 125 110 115 110 95
Piston stroke 849 849 920 920 920 765
Maximum cylinder length 2050 2050 2175 2175 2175 1850
MInimum cylinder length 1040 1040 1255 1255 1255 1085
Key size for piston safety nut 65 65 55 55 55 55
Cylinder Outriggers Boom swing Telescopic arm

Piston rod diameter 55 50 40
Internal cylinder diameter 110 115 70
Piston stroke 515 231.5 1140
Maximum cylinder length 1365 318 2590
MInimum cylinder length 850 86.5 1450
Key size for piston safety nut 65 65 46
BOOM
ARM
10-96 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

12
BUCKET
BOOM SWING
Unit: mm
Criteria
No Check item Cylinder Standard Tolerance Minimum Clearance Remedy
size Shaft Hole clearance limit
-0.030 +0.076
Boom 60 0.06 0.136
-0.060 +0.030
-0.030 +0.076
Arm 60 0.06 0.136
Clearance -0.060 +0.030
between piston Arm with tele- -0.030 +0.076
1 60 0.06 0.136
head and cylinder scopic arm -0.060 +0.030
head -0.030 +0.076
Bucket 60 0.06 0.136
-0.060 +0.030
-0.025 +0.064
Boom swing 50 0.05 0.114
-0.050 +0.025
-0.050 +0.24
Boom 50 0.13 0.329
-0.089 +0.08
Tolerance -0.050 +0.24
Arm 45 0.13 0.329
between bushing -0.089 +0.08
2
and piston head -0.050 +0.24
mounting pin Bucket 50 0.13 0.329
-0.089 +0.08
Replace
-0.050 +0.119
Boom swing 50 0.13 0.208 pin and
-0.089 +0.080
bushing
-0.050 +0.24
Boom 50 0.13 0.329
Tolerance -0.089 +0.08
between bushing -0.050 +0.24
3 Arm 45 0.13 0.329
and cylinder -0.089 +0.08
mounting pin -0.050 +0.119
Bucket 45 0.13 0.208
-0.089 +0.080
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-97

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT
12
FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT
10-98 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT
12 Unit: mm
Criteria
No Check item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
size Shaft Hole clearance limit
Clearance between bushing -0.050 +0.080
1 45 0.130 - 0.329 —
and bucket mounting pin -0.089 +0.240
2 45 0.130 - 0.329 —
and link mounting pin -0.089 +0.240
3 45 0.130 - 0.208 — Replace
and tilt lever mounting pin -0.089 +0.119
4 45 0.130 - 0.208 —
and link mounting pin -0.089 +0.119
5 50 0.118 - 0.323 —
and boom mounting pin -0.093 +0.240
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-99

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SWING BRACKET
12
SWING BRACKET
Unit: mm
Criteria
No Check item Standard Tolerance Standard Clear- Remedy
size Shaft Hole clearance ance limit
Clearance between rotating
-0.060 +0.090
1 bushing and boom swing cyl- 55 .0120 - 0.196 —
-0.106 +0.060
inder bushing
Clearance between bushing Replace
-0.060 +0.190
2 and lower swing bracket rotat- 65 0.250 - 0.370 — bushing
-0.106 +0.264
ing pin and pin
Clearance between bushing
-0.060 +0.190
3 and upper swing bracket rotat- 65 0.250 - 0.370 —
-0.106 +0.264
ing pin
Standard size Limit size
4 Upper shim thickness 0
4.75 —
– 0.1
0
5 Central shim thickness 4.75 —
– 0.1
0
6 Lower shim thickness 4.75 —
– 0.1
10-100 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION BACKHOE WORKING EQUIPMENT
12
BACKHOE WORKING EQUIPMENT
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-101

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION BACKHOE WORKING EQUIPMENT
12
Unit: mm
Criteria
No Check item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole clearance limit
Clearance between link
-0.050 -0.080
1 bushings and bucket 40 0.130 - 0.329 —
-0.089 -0.240
mounting pin
Clearance between arm
-0.050 -0.080
2 bushings and bucket 40 0.130 - 0.329 —
-0.089 -0.240
mounting pin
Clearance between arm
-0.050 -0.080
3 bushings and lever 45 0.130 - 0.329 —
-0.089 -0.240
mounting pin
Clearance between
-0.050 -0.080
4 bushings and tilt lever 45 0.130 - 0.329 — Replace
-0.089 -0.240
mounting pin
Clearance between
-0.050 -0.080
5 bushings and arm 50 0.130 - 0.208
-0.089 -0.119
mounting pin
Clearance between
-0.038 -0.080
6 bushings and boom 50 0.118 - 0.202
-0.083 -0.119
mounting pin
Clearance between
-0.050 -0.080
7 bushings and outrigger 45 0.130 - 0.329 —
-0.089 -0.240
mounting pin
10-102 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
12
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
1. Compressor TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure in circuit with engine at 2500 rpm and

2. Condenser
ambient temperature at 25 - 30″ C
3. Drying-filter tank Normal pressure: 1.5 - 1.7 MPa
4. Safety pressure Low pressure: 160 - 180 kPa

5. Expansion valve Safety pressures:
6. Evaporator High pressure: 2.6 MPa
7. Thermostatic clutch control sensor Low pressure: 250 kPa

8. Air circulation fan in cab Coolant fluid: R134a
9. Air conveyor Quantity of coolant: 970 ± 15 g
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 10-103

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
12
FUNCTION
The compressor (1) is driven directly by the engine shaft by means of a belt, and made to rotate by a pulley fitted with an elec-
tromagnetically-engaged clutch (1a).A thermostatic sensor (7) controls the engagement and disengagement of the clutch. It
disengages the clutch when the evaporator reaches the lower temperature limit and engages the clutch when the evaporator
reaches the upper temperature limit.
The coolant fluid (in gaseous phase) is drawn into the compressor where it is subjected to compression and an intense heating
process. In these conditions the fluid is then sent into the condenser (2) where, due to the heat extracted by ambient tempera-
ture air flowing over fins, it reaches condensation temperature, and passes into a high-pressure liquid state.
Subsequently the coolant passes into the drying-filter group (3) which performs three functions: it filters out impurities,
absorbs any moisture present in the circuit and, finally, also functions as a reserve tank.
The coolant in its liquid state is then transferred to the evaporator (6), first passing through an expansion valve (5). The task of
this valve is the constant metering of the quantity of fluid in order to maintain optimum evaporation. In the evaporator the
coolant fluid is subjected to expansion, bringing it up to the critical evaporation point at a temperature of approximately – 8°
C.
The flow of air generated by centrifugal fan (8) which passes through the evaporator (6) at ambient temperature is consider-
ably warmer than – 8° C. For this reason it yields heat to the coolant fluid, bringing it up to boiling point and complete evapo-
ration.
On leaving the evaporator (6) the coolant is drawn once more into the compressor (1) and a new cycle commences.
The yielding of heat from the atmosphere in which the evaporator is positioned leads to the condensation of the water sus-
pended in the air, and hence to dehumidification.
The condensate is deposited on the evaporator fins where, if a temperature higher than 0° C is not maintained, it freezes and
inhibits the functioning of the evaporator.
The task of keeping the temperature of the evaporator above 0° C (and thus within the optimum limits for heat exchange) is
entrusted to a thermostatic sensor (7). The condensate that forms on the evaporator fins (6) also contains dust, pollens and par-
ticles suspended in the air. Continual condensation therefore effectively purifies the air, and the droplets of condensate are dis-
charged to the exterior.
A fixed quantity of anti-freeze oil is also introduced into the circuit, with the function of lubricating all the mechanical parts of
the unit. A percentage of this oil circulates constantly throughout the unit in nebulized form, lubricating the compressor (pis-
tons and bearings) and the expansion valve.
A pressure switch (4) has been inserted in the electrical control circuit to protect the unit in the case of a lack of coolant fluid
or if the quantity becomes insufficient due to leakages. This switch will inhibit the engagement of the electromagnetic clutch
and hence the functioning of the air-conditioning unit.
10-104 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

20 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
STANDARD
12 VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-31
ENGINE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32
VALVE CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33
COMPRESSION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-34
FUEL INJECTION TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35
FAN AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
TENSION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-38
CHECKING TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-38
TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-38
ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER TRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-39
ACCELERATOR PEDAL TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-39
ACCELERATOR LEVER TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL AND MICROSWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
MASTER CYLINDER ROD ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
MICROSWITCHES ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
BLEEDING AIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
BLEEDING AIR FROM PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
BLEEDING AIR FROM CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
BLEEDING AIR FROM OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK PRESSURIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE FROM THE CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
BLEEDING AIR FROM THE BRAKING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
CHECKING AIR BLEEDING FROM BRAKING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
ATTACHMENTS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-45
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-45
TESTING AND SETTING GENERAL VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-48
FRONT SHOVEL CONTROL VALVE (2-3 SPOOLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-48
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE (6-7-8 SPOOLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-48
TESTING SECONDARY VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-48
SETTING MAIN AND SECONDARY VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-51
MAIN RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-51
SECONDARY VALVES B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-52
LOAD SENSING SIGNAL (LS VALVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-53
LOAD SENSING VALVE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-53
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-1 1

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
UNLOADING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-54

UNLOADING VALVE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-54
UNLOADING VALVE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
PRIORITY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-56
TESTING PRIORITY VALVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-56
CLEANING PRIORITY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-56
STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-57
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-57
SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-57
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-58
TESTING CIRCUIT AND BRAKE PUMP TIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-58
TESTING BRAKING GROUP LEAK TIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-58
ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60
PREPARING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60
TESTING WITH THE TORQUE CONVERTER UNDER STRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61
TESTING THE TORQUE CONVERTER AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEM UNDER STRESS . 20-61
POWER TRAIN GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
PREPARING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
CONVERTER OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-63
POWER TRAIN CLUTCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
PREPARATION OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
SENSOR FOR RETURN TO DIG DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-65
CAUSES OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
FRONT EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
TESTING OF FRONT BUCKET LIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
TESTING OF FRONT BUCKET DUMPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-67
BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-68
BOOM TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-68
ARM TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-68
BUCKET TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-69
OUTRIGGER TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70
AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-71
TESTING THE WORKING TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-71
CHECKING THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-72
EMPTYING THE AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-72
FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-74
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-79
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-84
WARNING! Before testing, adjusting or troubleshooting, make sure the machine is parked on firm, level
ground. Check that all machine safety devices are applied and that blocks are in place to prevent the
machine from moving.
WARNING! WHen workingt with other workers, use agreed upon signals and do not let unauthorized
persons near the machine.
WARNING! Before checking coolant level, wait until it has cooled. If the radiator cap is removed when
the coolant is hot, the coolant will spurt our and cause burns. Be careful when working close to moving
parts (fan, fan belt, etc.) Entangelment with moving parts can cause serious injury.
20-2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE
STANDARD
12 VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE
Machine Model WB140-2N (ASPIRATED)
Engine 4D106-1FA
Standard Permissible
Check Item Test Conditions Unit
Value Value
High idling rpm 2375±50 2325 – 2425
Engine Speed Low idling rpm 1050±50 1000 – 1100
Set idling rpm 2200 –
Exhaust Gas Sudden acceleration Bosch 0.9 1.2
Color At high idling speed index 0.5 0.8
Valve Intake valve (20°C) mm 0.20±0.05 Max. 0.25
Clearance Exhaust valve (20°C) mm 0.20±0.05 Max. 0.25
Compression
Oil temperature 69 – 72°C kg/cm² 34.97±1.02 28.04±1.02
Pressure
(Engine speed) rpm 250 250
(SAE30 oil)
Blow - By
Water temperature within operating range – –
Pressure mm H2O
At high idling speed – –
(SAE30 oil)
Max. idling (in cold state) kg/cm² Max. 5.9 Max. 5.9
Engine Oil
At set speed kg/cm² 4.48 3.97 – 4.99
Pressure
At low idling kg/cm² 1.02 Min. 1.02
Oil
Entire speed range °C 120 Max. 120
Temperature
Fuel Injection
B.T.D.C. degrees 12.5 11.5 – 13.5
Timing
Fan Belt Deflection when pressed with finger force
mm 10 10 – 15
Tension or approx. 10 kg
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-3 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE
12
WB140-2N (TURBOCHARGED) WB150-2N
S4D106-1FH S4D106-1FA
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
value value value value
2375±50 2325 – 2425 2375±50 2325 – 2425
1050±50 1000 – 1100 1050±50 1000 – 1100
2200 – 2200 –
0.9 1.5 0.9 1.5
0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0
0.30±0.05 Max. 0.35 0.30±0.05 Max. 0.35
0.30±0.05 Max. 0.35 0.30±0.05 Max. 0.35
34.3±1 27.5±1 34.3±1 27.5±1

250 250 250 250
– – – –
– – – –
Max. 5.9 Max. 5.9 Max. 5.9 Max. 5.9

4.48 3.97 – 4.99 4.48 3.97 – 4.99
1.02 Min. 1.02 1.02 Min. 1.02
120 Max. 120 120 Max. 120
12.5 11.5 – 13.5 12.5 11.5 – 13.5
10 10 – 15 10 10 – 15
20-4 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS
STANDARD
12 VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS
Machine Model WB140-2N (ASPIRATED)
Engine 4D106-1FA
l a b c l a b c
All controls
(front bucket and
Control valve
backhoe) 41.5 8 8 – – – – –
mm
For front shovel arm

command only 41.5 8 8 – – – – –
(with floating arm)
Front bucket tilt lever Raise

Neutral ➞ 85 60 – 110
control Lower
Front bucket control Dump
Neutral ➞ 115 90 – 140
lever Curled
Boom backhoe control Raise
Neutral ➞ 100 80 – 120
lever Lower
Arm backhoe control Opening
Travel of levers and pedals
• Engine stopped Neutral ➞ 100 80 – 120

lever Closing
• At the centre of the
Bucket backhoe control knob lever Opening
Neutral ➞ 100 80 – 120
lever • Valve reading at the Closing
mm
Boom swing backhoe end of working Right
stroke Neutral ➞ 100 80 – 120
control lever Left
• Attachments on the
Up
Outriggers control lever ground Neutral ➞ 50 35 – 65
Down
Fuel control lever Min. ➞ Max. 70 50 – 90
Telescopic arm control Out 15 10 – 20

Neutral ➞
pedal In 30 20 – 40
Right 15 10 – 20
Breaker control pedal Neutral ➞
Left 30 20 – 40
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-5 1

12
2375±50 2325 – 2425 2375±50 2325 – 2425
1050±50 1000 – 1100 1050±50 1000 – 1100
1950±50 1900 – 2000 1950±50 1900 – 2000
1050±50 1000 – 1100 1050±50 1000 – 1100
l a b c l a b c l a b c l a b c
41.5 8 8 – – – – – 41.5 8 8 – – – – –
41.5 8 8 – – – – – 41.5 8 8 – – – – –
85 60 – 110 85 60 – 110
115 90 – 140 115 90 – 140
100 80 – 120 100 80 – 120
100 80 – 120 100 80 – 120
100 80 – 120 100 80 – 120
100 80 – 120 100 80 – 120
50 35 – 65 50 35 – 65
70 50 – 90 70 50 – 90
15 10 – 20 15 10 – 20
30 20 – 40 30 20 – 40
15 10 – 20 15 10 – 20
30 20 – 40 30 20 – 40
20-6 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Machine model WB140-2N (ASPIRATED)
Classi- Standard Permissible
Check item Test conditions Unit
fication value value
• Engine stopped
Travel of levers and
Accelerator pedal • At the centre of the Min. ➞ Max. mm 80 60 – 100

knob lever
pedals
• Valve reading at the

end of working
stroke Right ➞ Left
Wheel steering • Attachments on the rev. Max. 2.5 2.2 – 2.5
ground Left ➞ Right
Front bucket tilt lever 2.5 2–3

control
Front bucket control lever 2.5 2–3
Boom control lever 1.5 1–2

• Engine speed: max.
Force for lever and pedal operation
Arm control lever • Oil temperature: 45 – 55°C 1.5 1–2

• Tool connection at the centre of knob
Bucket control lever (for levers) 1.5 1–2
• Tool connection on edge (for pedals)
Boom swing control lever 1.5 1–2
kg
Outriggers control lever 3 2.5 – 3.5
Fuel control lever 12 10 – 14
Telescopic arm control In 4 3–4

pedal Out 8 6 – 10
Breaker control pedal 8 6 – 10
Accelerator pedal 3 2–4
Brake pedal 30 Max. 60
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-7 1

12
80 60 – 100 80 60 – 100
Max. 2.5 2.2 – 2.5 Max. 2.5 2.2 – 2.5
2.5 2–3 2.5 2–3
2.5 2–3 2.5 2–3
1.5 1–2 1.5 1–2
1.5 1–2 1.5 1–2
1.5 1–2 1.5 1–2
1.5 1–2 1.5 1–2
3 2.5 – 3.5 3 2.5 – 3.5
12 10 – 14 12 10 – 14
4 3–4 4 3–4
8 6 – 10 8 6 – 10
8 6 – 10 8 6 – 10
3 2–4 3 2–4
30 Max. 60 30 Max. 60
20-8 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
2-3-Spool control valve 188.65 188.65±7.14

Main valve pressure
• Engine speed: max.

• Oil temperature: 45 – 55°C
• Without steering kg/cm²
6-7-8-Spool control valve 211.08 211.08±7.14
Steering unit • Engine speed: 1500±50 rpm 178.45 178.45±7.14
Front bucket 239.63 239.63±7.14

(curled) ✽
Front bucket 178.45 178.45±7.14
(dump)
Attachment
Pressure of secondary valve circuits
239.63 239.63±7.14
(3rd spool) ✽
Boom 362 362±7.14
(raising) ✽ • Engine speed: 1500±50 rpm
• Oil temperatures: 45 – 50°C
Boom (lowering) 249.83 249.83±7.14
• Check one circuit at a time
kg/cm²
Arm (closing) 249.83 249.83±7.14
✽ Check on bench test
(do not check on the machine)
Boom swing 193.75 193.75±7.14
Bucket (curled) 249.83 249.83±7.14
Breaker (delivery) 173.35 173.35±7.14
Steering unit (safety) ✽ 244.73 244.73±7.14
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-9 1

12
188.65 188.65±7.14 188.65 188.65±7.14
211.08 211.08±7.14 211.08 211.08±7.14
178.45 178.45±7.14 178.45 178.45±7.14
239.63 239.63±7.14 239.63 239.63±7.14
178.45 178.45±7.14 178.45 178.45±7.14
239.63 239.63±7.14 239.63 239.63±7.14
362 362±7.14 362 362±7.14
249.83 249.83±7.14 249.83 249.83±7.14
249.83 249.83±7.14 249.83 249.83±7.14
193.75 193.75±7.14 193.75 193.75±7.14
249.83 249.83±7.14 249.83 249.83±7.14
173.35 173.35±7.14 173.35 173.35±7.14
244.73 244.73±7.14 244.73 244.73±7.14
20-10 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
• Engine speed: (without load): 2375±50
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55°C
With converter • Converter oil temperature: 80°C 2100±50 2050 – 2150
• Machine in 4th gear
• Working brakes applied
Converter
• Engine speed: (without load): 2375±50 rpm

• Converter oil temperature: 80°C
With converter and
• Machine in 4th gear 2000±50 1950 – 2050
hydraulic circuit
• Working brakes applied
• Front bucket curl stopped
• Steering at the end of the stroke
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-11 1

12
2100±50 2050 – 2150 2275±50 2225 – 2325
2000±50 1950 – 2050 2000±50 1950 – 2050
20-12 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
★ The technical data in the following table refers to a machine with maximumn 500 kg shovel bucket, 600 mm (maximum
160 gk) backhoe bucket and standard arm (or telescopic arm) closed.

Measuring position
Complete working
equipment
250 400
(Tip lowering of
bucket teeth)
Front bucket
• In this position, check the feedback of

Cylinders
each cylinder and the leakage with a mm 30 45
(cylinder in)
load applied to the tip of the bucket
teeth.
• Ground level
• Bucket: normal load (1500 kg)
• Engine stopped
Hydraulic drift working equipment
Bucket cylinder • Make measurements as soon as the

15 25
(cylinder in) engine is stopped.
• Measure the changes every 5 min. and
the total change after 15 min.
Complete working Measuring position

equipment
300 450
(Tip lowering of
bucket teeth)
Boom cylinders
35 50
(cylinder out)
Backhoe
• In this position, check the extension of mm

each cylinder and the leakage with a
Arm cylinder normal load on the bucket.
• On level ground. 15 25
(cylinder out)
• Bucket: normal load (450 kg)
• Engine stopped
• Make measurements as soon as the
Bucket cylinder engine is stopped.
• Measure the changes every 5 min. and 10 15
(cylinder in)
the total change after 15 min.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-13 1

12
250 400 250 400
30 45 30 45
15 25 15 25
300 450 300 450
35 50 35 50
15 25 15 25
10 15 10 15
20-14 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Measuring position
Boom swing • Oil temperature: 45 – 55°C 15 25

• Backhoe balanced on the guides, bucket
in transport position.
• Arm and bucket cylinder in. Put the
bucket link pin one (1) meter from the
ground and swing at the end of boom
Hydraulic drift working equipment
stroke in one of two directions.

• Move the machine onto an incline of 15°
and apply the parking brake.
• Stop the machine. After one (1) minute,
Backhoe
check the cylinder feedback opposite the

boom every 5 minutes for a total of 15 mm
minutes.
Measuring position
Outriggers 20 30

• Backhoe balanced.
• Boom and arm cylinders in, bucket
cylinder out.
• Outriggers at maximum extension.
• Engine stopped.
• Check the frame lowering for each side
every 5 minutes for a total of
15 minutes.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-15 1

12
15 25 15 25
20 30 20 30
20-16 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
2.0
Boom Max. 8.0
Front bucket
(each cylinder)
1.6
Bucket Max. 6.0
(each cylinder)
Boom 3.3 Max. 13.5
• Engine: Max. speed

Cylinder leaking
Arm 3.0 Max. 12.0

• Leaking check: check the low pressure
side of the cylinder.
mm
• Check one cylinder at a time.
• For tilt front bucket, front bucket and for
Bucket 2.4 Max. 9.5
swing, check the two cylinders
Backhoe
separately.
Boom swing 3.2 Max. 13.0
Outrigger 3.3 Max. 13.5
Telescopic arm 1.6 Max. 6.0
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-17 1

12
2.0 2.0
Max. 8.0 Max. 8.0
(each cylinder) (each cylinder)
1.6 1.6
Max. 6.0 Max. 6.0
(each cylinder) (each cylinder)
3.3 Max. 13.5 3.3 Max. 13.5
3.0 Max. 12.0 3.0 Max. 12.0
2.4 Max. 9.5 2.4 Max. 9.5
3.2 Max. 13.0 3.2 Max. 13.0
3.3 Max. 13.5 3.3 Max. 13.5
1.6 Max. 6.0 1.6 Max. 6.0
20-18 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Measuring position
Tilt lever front
Raised
bucket 3.6 3.1 – 4.1
Cylinders
extended out
Lowered
↕
Bucket on level • Engine speed: Max. 2.5 2.1 – 2.9
ground • Oil temperature: 45 – 55°C
Loader
• Speed up
Measuring position
Curled
2.5 2.1 – 2.9
Bucket
Cylinders out
↕
Dump
Cylinder in 3.2 2.7 – 3.7
• Engine speed: Max.
• Speed up
Measuring position
sec.
Lifting ●
2.3 1.9 – 2.7
Boom
Work equipment speed
Cylinders in
↕
Lowered
Teeth bucket on
level ground • Engine speed: 1700 +0 50 rpm 1.6 1.2 – 2.0
• Backhoe balanced
• Power mode
Measuring position
Opening
3.4 2.9 – 3.9

Arm
Backhoe
Cylinders in
↕
Closing ●
Cylinders out • Engine speed: 1700 +0 50 rpm 4.3 3.8 – 4.8

• Power mode
Measuring position
Dump
2.1 1.7 – 2.5

Bucket
Cylinders in
↕
Curled
Cylinders out • Engine speed: 1700 +0 50 rpm 2.9 2.5 – 3.3

• Power mode
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-19 1

12
3.6 3.1 – 4.1 3.6 3.1 – 4.1
2.5 2.1 – 2.9 2.5 2.1 – 2.9
2.5 2.1 – 2.9 2.5 2.1 – 2.9
3.2 2.7 – 3.7 3.2 2.7 – 3.7
2.3 1.9 – 2.7 2.3 1.9 – 2.7
1.6 1.2 – 2.0 1.6 1.2 – 2.0
3.4 2.9 – 3.9 3.4 2.9 – 3.9
4.3 3.8 – 4.8 4.3 3.8 – 4.8
2.1 1.7 – 2.5 2.1 1.7 – 2.5
2.9 2.5 – 3.3 2.9 2.5 – 3.3
20-20 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Measuring position
Right ●
3.5 3.1 – 3.9
Boom swing
Backhoe
Right end travel sec.

↕
Left end travel
Left ●
• Engine speed: 1700 +0 50 rpm 3.5 3.1 – 3.9
• Arm horizontal
• Power mode
● The time referenced is for the cylinder stroke without the brake phase
NOTE: The engine speed (1700 0+50 rpm) has to be checked using the procedure described in paragraph
“ENGINE SPEED“ in this section of the manual.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-21 1

12
3.5 3.1 – 3.9 3.5 3.1 – 3.9
3.5 3.1 – 3.9 3.5 3.1 – 3.9
20-22 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Classi-
fica- Check item Test conditions Unit
value value
tion
Measuring position
Tilt lever front

0 Max. 2
bucket
• Engine speed: Min.

• Check the time needed to lift the bucket from
level ground.
Measuring position
Time lags
Boom 0 Max. 2
sec.
• With attachments fully extended, lower the
boom and check the elapsed time from the
beginning of the machine lifting until the bucket
is on level ground.
Measuring position
Arm 0 Max. 2

• Put the boom at 45° and open the arm com-
pletely
with the bucket curled. Extend arm cylinder and
check the elapsed time between arm stop at dead
center and restart movement.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-23 1

12
0 Max. 2 0 Max. 2
0 Max. 2 0 Max. 2
0 Max. 2 0 Max. 2
20-24 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Classi-
fica- Check item Test conditions Unit
value value
tion
Measuring position
Bucket 0 Max. 2

• Put arm in horizontal position. Tilt back the
bucket cylinder and then extend it.
• Check the elapsed time between bucket stop at
dead center and the restart movement.
Work equipment
Time lags
Measuring position sec.
Outriggers 0 Max. 2

• Boom, arm, and bucket fully retracted and
placed in machine centre position.
• Check the time needed for outriggers to raise the
machine from when they lean on level ground.
• Check each outrigger separately.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-25 1

12
0 Max. 2 0 Max. 2
0 Max. 2 0 Max. 2
20-26 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Classi-
fication
• Piston pump P1 delivery.
• Working mode: Economy.
• Pump speed: 2200 rpm
Pump characteristics
★ When measuring deliveries with the pump mounted on the machine, it becomes difficult to use the accelerator
to set the engine rpm to the test speed prescribed for the pump. Measure the delivery with the engine set to
2200 rpm, and perform a proportional calculation to find the delivery value required for the test.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-27 1

12
Classi-
fication
• Working mode: Power.
20-28 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Machine model WB140-2N (TURBO), WB150-2N
Classi-
fication
• Working mode: Economy.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-29 1

12
Machine model WB140-2N (TURBO), WB150-2N
Classi-
fication
• Working mode: Power.
20-30 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING SPECIAL TOOLS
SPECIAL
12 TOOLS
Measurement check point Symbol Code Name Qty Note
Commercially
Valve clearance A 1 Feeler gauge 1 –
available
1 Compression gauge 1 Kit Yanmar
Compression gauge B ATR800208
2 Adapter 1 TOL-97190080
Commercially
1 Multi-scale tachometer 1 20 – 4000 rpm
available
Engine speed C
ATR800060
2 Stroboscopic tachometer 1 6 – 30000 rpm
Only for Europe
Commercially
Oil and water temperature D 1 Digital thermometer 1 -50 – 1200°C
available
Commercially
1 Pressure gauge 2 Full scale 61.2 kg/cm²
available
Commercially
2 Pressure gauge 1 Full scale 255 kg/cm²
available
Commercially
E available
Hydraulic pressure Commercially
available
5 Servo control kit
Differential digital 1 0-1020 kg/cm²
6 ATR800200 pressure gauge
Only for Europe
1 Flow-meter 1 Delivery 0-300 l/min.
F
2 Pipe fitting kit 1 –
Air bleeding G 1 ATR201490 Tank cap 1 Pump air bleeding
Commercially
Hand brake L 1 Spring dynamometer 1 Full scale 20 kg
available
Commercially
1 Maintenance station 1 For coolant R134a
available
Commercially Sampling every 15 sec-
Air-conditioning unit M 2 Thermometer-hygrometer 1
available onds
Commercially
3 Leak detector 1 For coolant R134a
available
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-31 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED
ENGINE
12 SPEED
WARNING! When checking engine speed be careful. Do
not touch high temperature parts or get caught in rotating
parts.
★ Check the engine speed under the following conditions:
• Engine coolant temperature: 68 – 80 °C.

• Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C.
1. Install and connect tachometer C1.
★ If using stroboscopic tachometer C2, mark the timing notch on

the engine pulley for easier reading.
2. Start the engine and check:
• Low idling speed without load (accelerator pedal released in

minimum position).
• High idling speed without load (accelerator pedal at the travel
end).
• Low idling speed: 1050±50 rpm
• High idling speed: 2375±50 rpm
★ If low and high idling speeds are not within limits (without a load
on the engine), check the accelerator pedal stoppers and wiring in-
sulation before going on with other operations.
(See “ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER TRAVEL“)
20-32 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
VALVE
12 CLEARANCE
★ Measurement conditions:
• Engine: Cold
★ Adjust clearance between valves and rocker levers as follows:
Unit: mm
Engine Intake – exhaust
With cold 4D106-1FA 0.30±0.05
engine S4D106-1FH 0.30±0.05
S4D106-1FA 0.30±0.05
★ Firing order: 1-3-4-2-1..... at 180° steps.
★ Normal rotation: counterclockwise from flywheel
★ Cylinder No. 1 is opposite the fan side.
Adjusting procedure
1. Remove air cleaner B, muffler C, and valve cover D.
2. Rotate the crankshaft in its normal direction until the piston to be

checked is at full compression, Top Dead Center (TDC).
★ In this position intake and exhaust valves are closed.

3. Loosen lock nut E and unscrew tappet F about one (1) turn.
★ Check that valve insert G is laying flat on the valve stem and
that it is not worn.
• If valve inserts G are damaged, replace them with new
ones.
• Make sure that inserts fit and lay flat on the valve stem.
4. Place feeler gauge A1 between the insert and the rocker lever to be
adjusted. Rotate the tappet F until the rocker lever touches the feel-
er gauge.
5. Secure tappet F with lock nut E.
Nut: .............................................................. 14.7 – 19.6 N·m·
★ After tightening the lock nut, check the clearance again.

6. Adjust the next cylinder valve using this same procedure. Repeat
the procedure for the other cylinders, according to their firing order.
Valve cover installation
1. Check condition of valve cover D, gasket H, O-Rings I and lock

nuts J; carefully clean the contact surface of the cylinder head.
2. Install gasket H, valve cover D, fit O-Rings I and lock nuts J.
Cover lock nut: .......................................................25±3 N·m
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-33 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
COMPRESSION
12 PRESSURE
WARNING! When measuring the compression pressure
be careful not to get caught in the cooling fan, alternator
belt or in any other rotating parts. For this measurement
the engine should be at operating temperature. Take every
precaution against burns.
• Engine: at operating temperature

• Hydraulic oil: 55 – 60°C.
• Battery at full charge
• Valve clearance: Adjusted (see “VALVE CLEARANCE“)
1. Disconnect high pressure pipe B.
2. Remove nozzle holder assembly C of cylinder to be checked.
3. Disconnect connector D of fuel cut-off solenoid valve E.
4. Crank engine with starting motor.
5. Install B2 adapter and connect B1 pressure gauge. Check that the

seal is installed in the adapter and that it is not damaged.
6. Crank engine with starting motor and measure compression pres-

sure.
★ Measure the compression pressure at the point where the pres-

sure gauge indicator remains steady.
★ While measuring the compression pressure, monitor the engine
speed with stroboscopic tachometer; if speed is not within the
specified range, refer to the diagram.
★ Compression value: Normal: 34.97 ± 1.02 kg/cm² at 250 rpm
★ Minimum permissible: 28.04 ± 1.02 kg/cm² at 250 rpm
★ Difference between cylinders: 2.04 – 2.96 kg/cm²
7. After measuring, install nozzle holder assembly C, reconnect high
pressure pipe, feedback pipe and connector D.
Nozzle holder collar bolts:.............................. 9.8 – 11.8 N·m
High pressure union:..................................... 19.6 – 24.5 N·m
Note: Check compression in all cylinders.
20-34 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING FUEL INJECTION TIMING
FUEL
12 INJECTION TIMING
★ Check fuel injection timing of No. 1 cylinder by means of No. 1 de-
livery valve of injection pump.
★ Cylinders are numbered 1-2-3-4 starting from flywheel side.
1. Rotate crankshaft using engine pulley and put No. 1 cylinder piston
at top dead centre (TDC).
★ Top dead centre (TDC) is shown by notch E on pulley B posi-

tioned on "zero" of the scale F and by the closing of both cylinder
No. 1 valves.
★ If the notch E of pulley B is in "zero" position on the scale F but

cylinder No. 1 valves are not closed, rotate the crankshaft one (1)
full turn.
★ After recognition of TDC, rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise

(as viewed from the pulley side) about 20°.
2. Disconnect cylinder No. 1 high pressure pipe C from injection

pump.
3. Rotate crankshaft slowly in clockwise direction (as viewed from

the pulley side), checking fuel level in the No. 1 delivery holder of
injection pump.
4. Stop pulley B rotation as soon as the fuel level starts to increase.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-35 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING FUEL INJECTION TIMING
12
5. Check notch e position on crankshaft pulley b compared with
scale f; the indicated value should correspond to the angle of fuel
injection timing.
★ Standard fuel injection timing:

4D106-1FA:12.5° ±1°
S4D106-1FA:12.5° ±1°
S4D106-1FH:12.5° ±1°
NOTE: Repeat this procedure several times.
6. If injection timing does not meet standard value, rotate injection

pump g away from or toward the cylinder block after loosening
pump nuts h (quantity 4) and lock nuts i which attach bracket j
to the injection pump.
• To RETARD injection, rotate pump g away from the cylinder

block.
• To ADVANCE injection, rotate pump g toward cylinder block.
7. Tighten the pump lock nuts h at the cylinder block and lock nuts i
at bracket j.
Nuts: ............................................................. 34.2 – 44.1 N·m
Bracket lock nut:........................................... 44.1 – 53.9 N·m
8. Reconnect cylinder No. 1 high pressure pipe C to the injection

pump.
Delivery pipe union: ..................................... 19.6 – 24.5 N·m
20-36 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING FAN AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT
FAN
12 AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT
TENSION CHECK
1. Push fan belt B at the midway point between alternator C and the
pulley d operating the water pump. Check the deflection. With a
pressure of 10 kg, deflection should be 10 – 15 mm; if not, the belt
needs adjustment. With a new belt, deflection should be 7 – 9 mm.
TENSION ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen alternator mounting bolt d and adjustment plate mounting
bolt e.
2. Rotate alternator c to tension the fan belt b and tighten mounting

bolts c and e.
3. Check fan belt b tension.
★ If belt has been replaced, check tension again after about 20 hours
of operation.
Bolt d: .......................................................... 44.1 – 53.9 N·m
Bolt e: .......................................................... 22.5 – 28.4 N·m
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-37 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
COMPRESSOR
12 DRIVE BELT
CHECKING TENSION
1. Push fan belt b at midway point between compressor c and pulley
d. Check the deflection. With a pressure of 10 kg, deflection
should be 7 – 10 mm. If not, the belt needs adjustment.
★ With new belt deflection must be of 4 – 6 mm.
TENSION ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen mounting bolt e of the eccentric f.
2. Use a lever on eccentric f to correctly tension the belt and secure

the adjustment with bolt e.
3. Recheck belt b tension.
★ If belt has been replaced, check tension again after about 20 hours
of operation.
Bolt: .......................................................................... 123 N·m
20-38 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER TRAV-
ACCELERATOR
12 PEDAL AND LEVER TRAVEL
• Machine: shut down with all safety features engaged.

• Engine stopped and at operating temperature.
• Low and high idling speed: within standard value.
★ In order to check high speed engine idling, push the accelerator
pedal B manually.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT

1. Make sure that accelerator pedal b is fully raised and accelerator
lever c is at minimum stroke.
2. Check that accelerator lever d is in contact with low idling speed

adjusting screw e.
3. Adjust nut f and locknut g of accelerator pedal cable, and hand

accelerator at a distance of 0.2 – 0.3 mm from lever h.
4. Push accelerator pedal until accelerator lever d contacts the high

idling adjusting screw i.
5. Adjust the end travel stopper j of accelerator pedal b in this posi-

tion and secure it with nut 1).
6. Release the accelerator pedal b.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-39 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER TRAV-
ACCELERATOR
12 LEVER TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove mat and lateral cover B.
2. Loosen nut c and tighten the end lever travel bolt d a few turns.
3. Start the engine.
4. With lever e, set hand accelerator idling speed at 2000 ± 50 rpm.
★ Check using the stroboscopic tachometer C2.

5. Loosen end lever travel bolt d so that it is in contact with lever e
and then secure nut c.
6. Bring engine to low idle and check accelerator lever idling speed
adjustment by pushing the lever to the end of its stroke.
★ Engine idling speed: 2000 ± 50 rpm
20-40 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL AND MI-
BRAKE
12 PEDAL TRAVEL AND MICROSWITCHES
• Engine stopped
• Machine with attachments on ground
1. Check that pedal B is at stopper c and the pedals height matches
side view “A” measurement. If necessary, correct the height by ad-
justing stopper c.
★ “A” measure: 313 ± 3 mm

2. Check that pin D can freely run and lock the pedals B.
MASTER CYLINDER ROD ADJUSTMENT

1. Loosen nut E which locks adjusting rod F. Loosen the adjusting
rod until it touches the brake pump piston seat.
2. Tighten the adjusting rod F one turn (360°) and lock it with nut E.
3. Repeat Steps 1. and 2. for the other pedal.
★ After tightening nuts E, check that adjusting rod F touches the

brake pump piston seat.
MICROSWITCHES ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen microswitch locking nuts G.
2. Adjust microswitches H and make sure there is a minimum clear-

ance (about 1 mm, with pedals in neutral position) between the mi-
croswitches body and the pedal.
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify the below measurements as shown in the figure.
“A” measure: with pedal in neutral position
“B” measure: with master cylinder rod touching the pump
“C” measure: with pedal touching the microswitch
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-41 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING BLEEDING AIR
BLEEDING
12 AIR
BLEEDING AIR FROM PUMP
★ Bleeding air from pump is necessary: (make sure pump is full of
oil)
A. When installing pump.
B. When replacing connection hoses between pump and hydraulic

tank.
C. When replacing hydraulic oil and hydraulic tank after over-

haul.
Bleeding air is accomplished as follows:
1. Fill the hydraulic tank with oil and install plug G1.
2. Remove plug b on top side of pump c.
3. Connect plug G1 to low pressure compressed air connection.
4. Slowly and intermittently introduce compressed air into the hy-

draulic tank until oil flows out without air bubbles.
★ Maximum pressure in tank: 0.51 kg/cm²

5. Install plug b and lock it.
6. While slowly depressurizing the hydraulic tank, check the oil level.
Add oil as necessary to maintain the proper level.
7. Start the engine and run it for few minutes before bleeding air from
the whole system.
BLEEDING AIR FROM CYLINDERS

★ When hydraulic cylinders or pipe fittings have been replaced, it is
necessary to bleed air before using the machine again.
★ Operate one movement at a time starting from the main cylinders

(lifting).
1. Start the engine and run it at high idling speed for about 5 min. to
warm up the oil and pressurize hydraulic system.
2. Return engine to low idling speed, extend and retract the piston 4-5
times.
★ Extend, lower and retract pistons to within 100 mm of their

end of stroke.
3. Bring the engine to high idling speed and repeat Step 2. above. Re-
turn the engine to low idling speed and make a complete travel of
the piston until the hydraulic pump reaches its maximum pressure.
4. Repeat above operation (starting with Step 2.) for all cylinders.
20-42 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

BLEEDING
12Repeat
air bleedingaboveAIR FROM(starting
is obtained
operation OIL TANK
from point 2) for all cylin.he
1. Put the machine in oil level check position and remove the tank
plug. If necessary add oil to reach the correct level.
2. After stopping the engine wait for a few minutes until the air bub-
bles on oil surface disappear.
3. Install tank plug.
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK PRESSURIZATION

1. With engine at low idling speed, slowly extend all cylinders to their
end of stroke.
2. Stop the engine and remove tank plug.
3. Check the condition of gasket and reassemble plug.
★ Avoid increasing the engine speed until after completing all air
bleeding procedures and after the pressurization of oil tank.
★ After air bleeding procedures, operate engine at low idling
speed for about 10 minutes before starting to work.
RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE FROM THE
CIRCUITS
1. Put work attachments on level ground, stop the engine.
2. Move all control levers in all directions to completely release re-

main pressure in the cylinders and the main circuit.
3. Slowly loosen the oil filler from the tank to remove any residual pressure.
BLEEDING AIR FROM THE BRAKING CIRCUIT

★ You must bleed air from the braking circuit every time mainte-
nance is performed on the braking circuit, a component is
replaced, or when air has entered the circuit.
★ Machine must be stopped with attachments on level ground.
1. Make sure that oil in the brake system tank b is at maximum level.
2. Remove pedal lock pin.
3. Remove safety plugs and connect a plastic hose to the bleeding

screws c to catch the oil.
4. Push brake pedals to the bottom. Keeping them pushed, loosen

bleeding screw c of the left braking until the pedals reach the end
of their stroke.
5. Keeping pedal at the end of its stroke, tighten bleeding screw c.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-43 1

12
6. Release brake pedals, wait for few seconds and repeat above opera-
tions two or three times until oil without air bubbles flows out from
bleeding screw.
7. Repeat same operations for the right braking unit.
8. Disconnect pedal lock pin.
9. Push one brake pedal to bottom and, keeping it pushed, loosen

bleeding screw (2) of one of the two braking units until the pedal
reaches the end of its stroke.
★ Check that oil without air bubbles flows out from bleeding
screw (2).
10. Repeat same operations for the other braking unit.
★ Frequently check the oil level in the tank and refill it when the
level approaches minimum.
★ After bleeding the air, reinstall safety plugs on the screws (2) .
CHECKING AIR BLEEDING FROM BRAKING CIR-
CUIT
1. Start the engine and lower the backhoe outrigger and force them
downwards in order to raise the rear wheels.
2. Engage forward/reverse gear in order to move wheels.
3. Return the machine to neutral and lower it. Stop the engine.
4. Apply 50 kg on the pedal and verify measure “D”.
5. Insert pedal lock pin and applying the same mass verify the mea-
sure “D”.
★ “D” measure with one pedal pushed: not less than 165 mm
★ “D” measure with both pedals pushed: not less than 170 mm
20-44 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ATTACHMENTS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
ATTACHMENTS
12 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
INTRODUCTION
• The machine is equipped with two control valves having the following functions:
• Control valve No. 1 (2-3-spools): For front work attachments control.
• Control valve No. 2 (6-7-8-spools): For rear work attachments control.
• The two control valves are protected against overpressure by a main relief valve (general or pressure cut-off valve)
with adjustable setting.
• Control valves are fed by delivery pump P1.
• Delivery pump P1 is controlled by a priority valve (internal to control valve No. 1) when the steering unit is used.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-45 1

Control valves include spools which control the following:
2-SPOOL CONTROL VALVE

Control Port
Loader arm (lifting - lowering) A1 – B1
Front bucket (curled - dump) A2 – B2

Control Port
Loader arm (lifting - lowering) A1 – B1
Front bucket (curled - dump) A2 – B2
Optional attachment A3 – B3

Control Port
Arm (closing - opening) A1 – B1
Boom swing (left - right) A2 – B2
L. H. outrigger (up - down) A3 – B3
R. H. outrigger (up - down) A4 – B4
Bucket (dump - curled) A5 – B5
Boom (lifting - lowering) A6 – B6
20-46 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
(For telescopic arm)

Control Port
Telescopic arm (in - out) A7 – B7
(For breaker)
Control Port
Breaker (L. H. side) A7
(For breaker and telescopic arm)

Control Port
Breaker (L. H. side) A7
Telescopic arm (in - out) A8 – B8
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-47 1

TESTING
12 AND SETTING GENERAL VALVES
(Pressure cut-off valve or main relief valve)
★ The pressure readings are to be taken from check points on both

control valves.
• Engine: stopped and at operating temperature
• Hydraulic oil: 55–60 °C
• Parking brake: applied
FRONT SHOVEL CONTROL VALVE (2-3 SPOOLS)
1. Connect the pressure gauge E3 (408 kg/cm²) to the pressure adapter

B of the front shovel control valve C.
2. Start the engine, bring the accelerator pedal up to max. speed and
check the nominal pressure of the main relief valve (pressure cut-
off valve) by forcing the front bucket to rise to the end of its stroke.
★ Nominal pressure:
WB140-2N: 189±7.14 kg/cm²
WB150-2N: 204±7.14 kg/cm²
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE (6-7-8 SPOOLS)
1. Connect pressure gauge E3 (408 kg/cm²) to pressure adapter D of

backhoe control valve E.
2. Start the engine, bring the hand accelerator lever up to max. speed
and check the nominal pressure of the main relief valve (pressure
cut-off valve) while forcing the bucket into maximum curl position
(or forcing the raising of the boom to the end of its stroke).
★ Nominal pressure:
WB140-2N: 211±7.14 kg/cm²
WB150-2N: 224±7.14 kg/cm²
★ If the main relief valve pressures do not correspond to the
nominal values, they must be reset (See “TESTING AND
SETTING GENERAL VALVES“).
TESTING SECONDARY VALVES
• Engine: stopped and at operating temperature

• Hydraulic oil: 55–60 °C
• Parking brake: applied
1. Connect pressure gauge E3 (408 kg/cm²) to the pressure adapter f
of the control valve for the movement being tested.
2. Start the engine and bring the hand accelerator lever up to 1050
rpm.
3. Set the main relief valve f (pressure cut-off) to a value 30.6 kg/cm²
higher than the maximum pressure to be tested.
4. Check secondary valve g single movement pressure. Refer to the following tables for cylinder and movement.
20-48 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

WARNING! The secondary backhoe boom lifting valve pressure must be checked and set only during
bench testing.
Setting 2-spool control valve secondary valves
Unit: kg/cm²
Cylinder and movement Port Setting WB140-2N Setting WB150-2N
Lifting A1 — —
Loader arm
Lowering B1 — —
Curled A2 239.63±7.14 239.63±7.14
Front bucket
Dump ★ B2 178.45±7.14 178.45±7.14
★ This pressure can be set without modifying the general valve pressure.
Unit: kg/cm²
Lifting A1 — —
Loader arm
Lowering B1 — —
Curled A2 239.63±7.14 239.63±7.14
Front bucket
Dump ★ B2 178.45±7.14 178.45±7.14
A3 239.63±7.14 239.63±7.14
Optional attachment
B 239.63±7.14 239.63±7.14
Unit: kg/cm²
Closing A1 249.83±7.14 249.83±7.14
Arm
Opening B1 — —
Left A2 193.75±7.14 193.75±7.14
Boom swing
Right B2 193.75±7.14 193.75±7.14
Up A3 — —
Left outrigger
Down B3 — —
Up A4 — —
Right outrigger
Down B4 — —
Dump A5 — —
Bucket
Curled B5 249.83±7.14 249.83±7.14
Lifting ★ A6 262±7.14 262±7.14
Boom
Lowering B6 249.83±7.14 249.83±7.14
★ This pressure can only be set during bench testing.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-49 1

12
Nominal values for the reducing valves of the 7-8 spool control valve
(for other settings, refer to the 6-spool control valve)
Unit: kg/cm²
No. of spools Cylinder and movement Port Setting WB140-2N Setting WB150-2N
Left A7 173.35±7.14 173.35±7.14
Breaker
Right ★ B7 — —
7
In A7 — —
Telescopic arm
Out B7 — —
Left A7 173.35±7.14 173.35±7.14
Breaker
Right ★ B7 — —
8
In A8 — —
Telescopic arm
Out B8 — —
★ If valve pressure indications do not correspond to those listed, proceed to the next Step.
★ Set the general valve pressure to the standard value.
SETTING MAIN AND SECONDARY VALVES

MAIN RELIEF VALVES
• General valves (pressure cut-off valve b)

WARNING! For adjustments, prepare machine as for
pressure testing.
1. Remove safety plug.
2. Loosen lock nut D.
3. Force the specific control lever to the end of its stroke.
• Front shovel: Force the front bucket to rise to the end of its
stroke.
• Backhoe: Force the bucket into maximum curl position or
force the raising of the boom to the end of its stroke.
4. Adjust pressure with adjusting screw E.
• To INCREASE pressure, rotate in CLOCKWISE direction.

• To DECREASE pressure, rotate in COUNTER CLOCKWISE
direction.
5. Tighten locknut D to secure the adjustment.
6. Reinstall safety plug.
20-50 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

SECONDARY VALVES B
WARNING! For secondary valve adjustments, prepare

the machine as for secondary valve pressure testing.
(see“TESTING SECONDARY VALVES“ )
★ The pressure must be set while the control lever (for the cylinder
being tested) is forced to the end of its stroke.
1. Remove safety plug c.
2. Loosen locknut d.
3. Adjust pressure with adjusting screw e.

• To DECREASE pressure, rotate in COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
direction.
4. Tighten locknut d to secure the adjustment.
Locknut:..................................................................10±1 N·m
WARNING! After pressure is adjusted, install the safety

plug c to avoid unauthorized settings.
5. Reset the main relief (pressure cut-off, general) valve pressure to

the standard value after all of the secondary valves have been
checked and set.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-51 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING LOAD SENSING SIGNAL (LS VALVE)
LOAD
12 SENSING SIGNAL (LS VALVE)
• Engine: stopped and at working temperature.

• Hydraulic oil: 45 – 55 °C.
• Machine: front equipment on the ground, parking brake
applied and boom and arm fully extended.
• Working mode: Power
1. Disconnect hose b from the Load Sensing line. Install a tee and re-
connect hose b.
2. Remove plug c and install pressure adapter (M8x1)
3. Connect pressure gauge E5 to the adapter.
4. Start the engine and bring it to 1050±50 rpm, without any machine
movement (lever in neutral position), read the ∆P pressure.
Normal value: .....................................24.47±1.02 kg/cm²

★ If the ∆P value is not within limits, adjust the Unloading valve.
(see “UNLOADING VALVE“)
5. Raise boom up to the end of its stroke and read the ∆P pressure.

★ If the ∆P value is not within limits, adjust the Load Sensing
Valve d.
LOAD SENSING VALVE ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove nut e.
2. Loosen locknut f.
3. Adjust pressure using adjustment screw g.

• To DECREASE pressure, rotate in COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
direction.
4. Tighten locknut f to secure the adjustment.
Locknut:...................................................................... 21 N·m
5. Check gasket h and install nut e.
Nut: ............................................................................. 21 N·m
20-52 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING UNLOADING VALVE
UNLOADING
12 VALVE

• Machine: front equipment on the ground, parking brake
applied and boom and arm fully extended.
• Working mode: Power
1. Disconnect hose b from the Load Sensing line. Install a tee and re-
connect hose b.
2. Remove plug c and install pressure adapter (M8x1)
3. Connect pressure gauge E5 to the adapter.
4. Start the engine and bring it to 1050±50 rpm, without any machine
movement (lever in neutral position), read the ∆P pressure.

★ If the ∆P value is not within limits, adjust the Unloading valve
D.
UNLOADING VALVE ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove plug e, spring f, washers g, and valve body h.
2. Place a shim i under the spring f and install the valve.
• One shim (1 mm thick) increases pressure ∆P by 3.06 kg/cm².

Plug:.......................................................................... 100 N·m
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-53 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING UNLOADING VALVE FUNCTION
UNLOADING
12 VALVE FUNCTION

• Machine: in safe condition, parking brake applied.
• Control valve lever at neutral position.
1. Disconnect hose b from the Load Sensing line. Install tee C and
reconnect hose b.
2. Connect a pressure port and gauge E1 (61.18 kg/cm²) to the tee C.
3. Connect a second gauge E1 (61.18 kg/cm²) to rear control valve

pressure port D.
4. Start the engine at low idle and without any machine movement,
check pressure on both gauges.
★ Normal pressure (P) control valve gauge: 27.5±3.06 kg/cm²

★ Normal pressure Load Sensing line gauge (PLS): 6.12±2.04
kg/cm² (This value is due to the influence of the counterpres-
sure present in the steering circuit).
★ If any variations are found, they do not represent a problem
provided that the difference of 21.41±1.02 kg/cm² between the
two readings is respected.
5. If the difference between the two readings is higher than
21.41±1.02 kg/cm², stop the engine and release residual pressures.
6. Thoroughly clean the valve E and re-install it.
Valve: .......................................................................... 20 N·m
7. If, in spite of cleaning the valve E, the value still does not fall with-
in the tolerance limits of 21.41±1.02 kg/cm², install a new valve.
20-54 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING PRIORITY VALVE
PRIORITY
12 VALVE
• Parking brake applied
TESTING PRIORITY VALVE OPERATION
1. Connect a pressure gauge E2 (255 kg/cm²) to the pressure adapter
b of the backhoe control valve.
2. Start the engine and bring it to the idling speed of 1500±50 rpm.
3. Check gauge E2 pressure value with stopped steering wheel.

(21.41 kg/cm²).
4. Slightly turn the steering wheel and check that pressure increases.
5. Continue turning the steering wheel to the end of a full turn and
check that while forcing the steering wheel, pressure increases to
the normal value.
Normal pressure: 178.45±7.14 kg/cm².

★ If the pressure does not reach the normal value, reset the pres-
sure of the steering unit
★ If the pressure indicated by the gauge does not change while
turning the steering wheel, and it takes excessive force to turn
the wheel, the priority valve c needs to be cleaned.
CLEANING PRIORITY VALVE
1. Remove priority valve plug d, spring e and rod f.
★ Carefully check and make notes on the disassembly so that you

can reassemble the priority valve.
2. Disassemble the plug g and remove the ball h of the inside valve
and the spring i.
3. Check that hole j and nozzle 1) are completely clean.
4. Replace the spring i, ball h and the plug g.
Plug: ..................................................................... Loctite 542
Plug:........................................................................... 20 N·m
★ Do not allow any Loctite to enter hole j.

★ Remove all excess Loctite from rod f.
5. Lubricate rod f and install it in its seat. Make sure that it slides
freely.
6. Insert spring e and install plug d.
Plug:......................................................................... 100 N·m.
7. Start the motor, execute several steering manoeuvres. If the fault is not corrected, replace the complete steering column
with a new one.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-55 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
STEERING
12 CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
★ Measurement condition:
• Engine: operating temperature

• Hydraulic oil: 55 – 60 °C
TESTING
1. Connect a pressure gauge E2 (255 kg/cm²) to the pressure adapter
B of the backhoe control valve.
2. Start the engine and bring it to idle speed 1500±50 rpm. Turn the
steering wheel from end to end.
3. Force the steering wheel to the end of its rotation and check the
pressure.
Normal pressure: 178.45±7.14 kg/cm²
4. Check the pressure at the other end of the steering direction as well.
SETTING
If the pressure is not within permissible limits, reset the pressure on the
upper valve D of the steering unit.
1. Remove plug E.
2. Insert a 4 mm wrench and loosen screw F.
3. Adjust pressure with screw G.
• To INCREASE pressure rotate in CLOCKWISE direction.

• To DECREASE pressure rotate in COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
direction.
4. Stop the engine. Secure adjustment screw G by tightening screw F.
5. Install plug E making sure that gasket H is properly seated.
20-56 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE
12 SYSTEM
★ Measurement condition:
• Engine: stopped
• Machine: on solid and level ground, with equipment raised and
safety devices engaged.
• Brake pedals: independent, with the fluid container level at
maximum.
System testing is in two parts:
1. Testing circuit and brake pump tightness.
2. Leak tightness test of the braking group.
WARNING! If both the tests give positive results, check for

leaks in the piping of the braking system
TESTING CIRCUIT AND BRAKE PUMP TIGHT-

NESS
1. Disconnect the equalizer connecting pipe C from the brake pumps
b of the circuit being tested.
2. Securely plug the equalizer orifice A when the pipe is disconnect-

ed.
3. Remove clamp d and disconnect delivery lines e from the pumps.
4. Connect pressure gauge E2 (255 kg/cm²) to pump b.
5. Push the brake pedal corresponding to the pump and bring the cir-
cuit up to a pressure of approximately 122.36 kg/cm².
★ Do not exceed the maximum permissible value of 153±5.1 kg/

cm².
6. Keep the pedal pushed for at least 2 minutes and check that the ped-
al pressure and position remain steady.
★ If the position of the pedal changes to maintain the pressure,

the pressure loss is due to leaks inside the pump. This can be
confirmed by checking the oil. If there are leaks, it will show
signs of mixing.
7. Repeat the test for the other brake pump.
TESTING BRAKING GROUP LEAK TIGHTNESS

1. Disconnect the delivery tube f of the braking group being tested.
2. Connect the tee between delivery line f and the braking group.
★ Make sure to insert pressure adapter g between the braking

group and the cut-off valve h.
3. Connect pressure gauge E2 (255 kg/cm²) to the pressure adapter of
the tee and open the cock h.
4. Operate the brake pump to feed pressure into the circuit to a maxi-
mum pressure of 153±5.1 kg/cm².
5. Close valve h to maintain pressure in the braking group being tested.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-57 1
TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE SYSTEM
6. Release the brake pedal and observe the pressure indicated by
gauge E2 for 2 minutes.
★ If the pressure value shows a negative change, it means that the

braking piston seals are defective.
WARNING! Further confirmation of the leak can be
obtained by an increase in the oil level in the axle, which
leads to a mixing of the oils. Change all the sealing rings
between the axle sections, and carry out a complete lubri-
cation oil change.
7. Repeat the test for the other braking group, following the same
method.
8. Reassemble the braking circuit
WARNING! After testing and any repairs, bleed air from

the brake units (see “BLEEDING AIR“).
20-58 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD
ENGINE
12 SPEED UNDER LOAD

• Power train oil: up to working temperature.
• Brake pedals: connected by a cotter-pin.
• Machine: on solid and level ground with the equipment raised
and safety devices engaged.
Two tests must be performed:
1. Speed test with the torque converter under stress.
2. Speed test with the torque converter and the hydraulic system under
stress.
★ The tests must be performed after a no-load test of the engine

speed. (For details, see “ENGINE SPEED“).
WARNING! During the following tests, while accelerating
the engine with the gear engaged, the condition of the
brake disks can also be checked. If, while force is being
exerted on the brake pedals, the machine moves (even
slowly);
a - Release the accelerator immediately and stop the
engine.
b - Check the wear on the brake disks and change them
before completing the tests.
(See "DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY- REAR AXEL")
PREPARING THE MACHINE

1. Prepare the tachometer C1 to measure the engine rpm.
★ If mounting an electronic pressure transducer tachometer on a

diesel delivery line to the injection nozzles, make sure that it is
placed far away from the clamp.
★ If using a stroboscopic tachometer C2, make a clearly visible
notch on the engine pulley to facilitate the reading.
WARNING! Make sure that the brake pedals are fastened
together with the cotter pin b.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-59 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD
TESTING
12 WITH THE TORQUE CONVERTER UN-
DER STRESS
1. Start the motor at MIN. Engage the highest FORWARD gear and
apply the brake firmly.
2. While keeping the brake applied, accelerate the engine gradually up

to high idling and measure the speed reached.
★ Speed: WB140-2N:2100±50 rpm

WB150-2N: 2275±50 rpm
3. Release the accelerator pedal and move on to the next test.
TESTING THE TORQUE CONVERTER AND HY-

DRAULIC SYSTEM UNDER STRESS
1. Start the motor at MIN. Engage the highest FORWARD gear and
apply the brake firmly.
2. While keeping the brake applied, engage the upper FORWARD

gear, accelerate the engine gradually and at the same time activate
the control valve lever for closing (curling) the front bucket, and
turn the steering wheel to, and hold it at, the end of its stroke.
3. Once the maximum engine speed and maximum pressure of the

bucket circuit have been reached, note the speed reached by the en-
gine.
★ Speed: WB140-2N:2000±50 rpm

WB150-2N: 2000±50 rpm
● If the revolutions of the engine are higher than the permissible limit
in both tests, check the delivery pressure to the converter and the
clutch pressures. (See “POWER TRAIN GROUP“).
● If the revolutions of the engine are lower than the permissible limit,
check the condition of the air filter, the engine compression, the
timing, the injection pump, and the valve clearances.
20-60 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING POWER TRAIN GROUP
POWER
12 TRAIN GROUP
The power train group can be used to perform pressure tests on the in-
ternal hydraulic circuit. These are useful for identifying malfunctions.
Specifically, the tests involve:
1. Converter oil pressure.
2. Clutch engagement pressures for both directions of travel.
★ Test conditions:
• Engine: stopped.
• Brake pedals: connected by a cotter pin.
PREPARING THE MACHINE
1. Prepare the tachometer C1 to measure the engine rpm.

placed far away from the line-clamp.
★ If using a stroboscopic tachometer C2, clearly mark the notch
on the engine pulley to facilitate the reading.
together with the cotter pin b.
CONVERTER OIL PRESSURE

1. Remove the plug P22 and connect pressure gauge E6.
2. Start and heat the engine and all the fluids up to working tempera-
ture. Make sure that the power train oil reaches a temperature of
80±5 °C.
3. With the engine at MIN (idling), check the pressure on the pressure
gauge E6.
★ Normal pressure: Min. 0.51 kg/cm²

4. Gradually increase the engine speed to MAX. Take a new reading
from the pressure gauge E6.
★ Normal pressure: 9.18 kg/cm²

5. Bring the engine back to MIN and compare the pressure with the
normal value.
★ Normal pressure: Min. 0.51 kg/cm²

★ If the maximum pressure value drops to below the permissible
lower limit, the power train pump needs an overhaul.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-61 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING POWER TRAIN GROUP
CLUTCH
12 ENGAGEMENT PRESSURE
1. Remove the access plate from the cab floor.
2. Remove plug P19 and connect pressure gauge E6.
80±5 °C.
4. With the engine at MIN (idling) check the pressure on the pressure
gauge E6.
★ Normal pressure: Max. 0.36 kg/cm²

5. Select REVERSE gear and gradually increase the engine speed to
MAX. Take a new reading from the pressure gauge E6.
★ Normal pressure: 11.22 – 13.26 kg/cm²

6. Bring the engine back to MIN and place the transmission in neutral.
Compare the pressure with the normal value.
★ Normal pressure: Max. 0.36 kg/cm²

7. Remove the pressure adapter and replace the plug P19.
Cap: ............................................................................ 23 N·m
8. Repeat the same test for the FORWARD gear, reading the pressure
from the orifice protected by plug P18.
• If the pressures are different for the two travel directions, there
is a loss of pressure on the clutch piston with lowest pressure.
20-62 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING POWER TRAIN CLUTCHES
POWER
12 TRAIN CLUTCHES
• Brake pedals: connected by a cotter pin.
★ This test must be performed after having checked the pressures of
the power train group.
PREPARATION OF THE MACHINE

1. Prepare tachometer C1 to measure the engine rpm.

placed far away from the line clamp.
★ If using a stroboscopic tachometer C2, clearly mark the notch
on the engine pulley to facilitate the reading.
WARNING! During the following tests, during the engine
acceleration phase with the gear engaged, the condition of
the brake disks can also be checked. With force being
exerted on the brake pedals, if there is movement (even
slowly):
a - Release the accelerator immediately and stop the
engine.
b - Check the wear on the brake disks and change them
before completing the tests.
together by the cotter pin B.
TESTING
80±5 °C.
2. With the engine in idling, accelerate to MAX. Check that the revo-
lutions remain within permissible limits. (See “ENGINE SPEED“)
3. Brake hard and bring the engine up to MAX.
4. Maintaining the braking action and the acceleration, engage the

FORWARD gear and check that the engine speed decreases until it
is once again within permissible limits. (See “ENGINE SPEED
UNDER LOAD“).
5. Repeat this test in REVERSE gear.
★ If the revolutions are higher than the permissible limits, the clutch-
es are worn, and must be replaced.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-63 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING SENSOR FOR RETURN TO DIG DEVICE
SENSOR
12 FOR RETURN TO DIG DEVICE
★ Adjustment conditions:
• Machine: on solid and level ground.

• Parking brake: engaged.
1. Rest the bucket on the ground, making sure that the bottom is paral-
lel to the surface.
2. Stop the engine and remove the sensor guard B.
3. Check that there is a distance of 3 - 4 mm between sensor C and

rod D. If necessary, loosen nuts E and adjust the distance until the
indicated measurement is obtained. Tighten the nuts to secure the
adjustment.
4. Loosen screw F and move bracket G towards the rear until the sen-
sor is completely free of rod D.
5. Start the engine and allow it to idle. Adjust the position of bracket
G until sensor C is engaged.
★ When the rod contacts the sensor, warning lamp H will be acti-
vated.
6. Secure bracket G position by tightening the screw.
7. Perform several tests by raising the bucket and simulating some

dumping manoeuvres. If the bucket is able to rest flat on the
ground, replace the sensor guard B.
20-64 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TESTING AND ADJUSTING CAUSES OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT
CAUSES
12 OF HYDRAULIC DRIFT
★ If working attachments have hydraulic drift, check if the drift is due
to the cylinder gaskets or the control valve.
• Engine: at operating temperature

• Remove and install pipes only after any remaining pressure has
been removed.
(See “RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE FROM THE
CIRCUITS“)
FRONT EQUIPMENT
TESTING OF FRONT BUCKET LIFTING
1. Position the bucket vertically with the teeth resting on 10 cm thick

blocks.
2. Stop the engine and remove any remaining hydraulic pressure.
3. Disconnect hoses B and C from the lift cylinders D and plug them.
4. Plug the lift cylinder base side. Apply a temporary hose to the head
side to catch any oil leakage.
5. Start the engine and retract the bucket until the teeth tilt 15° above
horizontal.
6. Stop the engine and check bucket link position for 5 minutes.
• If the bucket link has no lowering movement, drift is due to the

control valve.
To check each cylinder, proceed as follows:
7. Position the bucket vertically with the teeth resting on 10 cm thick

blocks.
8. Remove the plug (installed earlier in Step 4) from the base side of
one cylinder.
9. Start the engine and retract the bucket until the teeth tilt 15° above
horizontal.
10. Stop the engine and check the bucket position for 5 minutes.
• If the bucket link has a lowering movement, drift is due to gas-

ket seals of the plugged cylinder.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 to check the other cylinder.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-65 1

TESTING OF FRONT BUCKET DUMPING
12
1. Position the bucket on level ground and tilt the teeth up about 15°.
Put 1500 kg of weight into the bucket.
3. Disconnect hoses B and C from dump cylinders D and plug them.
4. Plug the dump cylinder base side. Apply a temporary hose to the
head side to catch any oil leakage.
5. Start the engine and raise the bucket up to horizontal alignment of

the bucket hinge and shovel arm hinge.
6. Stop the engine and check the bucket teeth position for 5 minutes.
• If bucket has no swing movement, drift is due to control valve.

To test the individual cylinders, proceed as follows:
7. Lower the bucket to the ground.
8. Remove from one of the cylinders the plug installed on the cylinder
base side in Step 3.
9. Start the engine and raise the bucket as indicated in Step 4.
10. Stop the engine and check the position of the bucket teeth for 5
minutes.
• If the bucket teeth turn, the drift is due to the gasket seals of the
plugged cylinder.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 to test the other cylinder.
20-66 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

BACKHOE
12
★ Test condition:
• Backhoe aligned
• Lifted outriggers
BOOM TESTING
1. Position the machine with its arm in vertical position with the bot-
tom of the bucket resting on level ground.
3. Disconnect hoses B and C from cylinder D and plug them.
4. Plug the cylinder head side.
5. Apply a temporary hose to the base side to catch any oil leakage.
6. Start the engine and extend the arm completely.
7. Stop the engine and check the boom position for 5 minutes.
• If the boom has a lowering movement, drift is due to cylinder

gaskets.
• If the boom has no lowering movement, drift is due to the con-
trol valve.
ARM TESTING
1. Position the machine with its arm fully extended with the bucket
opening and teeth on the ground.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-67 1

12
3. Disconnect hoses B and C from arm cylinder D and plug them.
★ If a safety valve is installed, remove it for this test.

4. Plug the arm cylinder hole on the head side. Attach a temporary
hose to the base side to catch any oil leakage.
5. Start the engine and raise the boom.
6. Stop the engine and check the arm position for 5 minutes.
• If the arm has a lowering movement, drift is due to the cylinder

gaskets.
• If the arm has no movement, drift is due to the control valve.
BUCKET TESTING
1. Position the machine with the bucket arm vertical and the bottom of
the bucket resting on level ground.
2. Put 450 kg of weight into the bucket
4. Disconnect hoses b and c from bucket cylinder d and plug them.
5. Plug the bucket cylinder hole on the base side and attach a tempo-
rary hose to the head side to catch any oil leakage.
20-68 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12R
6. Start the engine and raise the boom.
7. Stop the engine and check the bucket position for 5 minutes.
• If the bucket has an opening movement, drift is due to cylinder

gaskets.
• If the bucket has no movement, drift is due to the control valve.
OUTRIGGER TESTING
1. Position the machine with its arm in vertical position with the bot-
tom of the bucket resting on level ground.
2. Place support stands “A” of a suitable height beneath the outrig-

gers, and bring the cylinder eyes to a horizontal position.
3. Without forcing them, lower the outriggers onto the support stands.
4. Stop the engine and release any residual hydraulic pressure.
5. Remove hoses b and c from cylinders d and plug them.
6. Plug the cylinder base side c. Apply a temporary hose to the head
side to catch any oil leakage.
7. Start the engine. Use force on the boom to raise the machine and re-
move the support stands supporting the outriggers.
8. Lower the machine and stop the engine.
9. Check the outriggers position for 5 minutes.
• If one or both outriggers have a lowering movement, drift is

due to one or both cylinders.
• If there is no lowering, drift is due to the control valve.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-69 1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT
AIR-CONDITIONING
12 UNIT
• Machine on level ground with the work equipment raised and

safety devices engaged
• Parking brake engaged
TESTING THE WORKING TEMPERATURE
1. Connect the maintenance station to the high pressure valve (H.P.)
and the low pressure valve (L.P.)
2. Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of 1500 rpm.
3. Switch on the A/C unit using the switch in the cab.
4. Select an intermediate ventilation speed inside the cab.
5. Use the thermometer/hygrometer M2 to check that the temperature

inside the cab is equal to or lower than the ambient temperature.
★ If the temperature of the cab is higher than the ambient temper-

ature, open the doors and widows and wait until the cab tem-
perature stabilizes at the out-side value.
6. Close the doors and windows and let the A/C unit operating these
conditions for 5 - 10 minutes.
7. Use the thermometer M2 to check the temperature of the air at the

central outlets.
★ Position the probe as close as possible to the air outlets.

8. Compare the average value of the measured temperatures using the
following table:
Ambient
20 25 30 35
temperature °C
Outgoing air
6–8 8–10 8–12 9–14
temperature °C
9. If the average value of the temperature measured does not fall with-
in the values given in the table, it will be necessary to thoroughly
check the unit.
20-70 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

CHECKING
12 THE UNIT
Check the unit after the Steps 1., 2., 3., 4. and 6. of the preceding para-
graph.
A diagnosis of faults in the unit is based upon the working pressures.
When the pressures do not fall within the values given in the following
table, the causes must be found by checking the high-pressure (H.P.)
and low pressure (L.P.) pressure gauges.
Unit with R134a.

Outside
L.P. (kg/cm²) H.P. (kg/cm²)
Temperature (°C)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
20 1.2 2.5 6.0 9.0
25 1.0 2.5 7.5 10.5
30 1.1 2.4 9.5 13.0
35 1.3 2.4 12.0 15.5
40 1.5 1.8 18.0 18.8
45 1.8 1.9 21.5 22.0
The following conditions can be found:
Conditions Causes - Faults

• Electromagnetic pulley that slips or does not engage correctly
L.P. high - H.P. normal or low • Expansion valve blocked in open position
• Compressor damaged
• Expansion valve blocked in closed position or obstructed
L.P. low - A.P. high or normal • Filter saturated with moisture
• Obstruction in the L.P. line or in the H.P. line between the filter and the evaporator.
• Infiltration of hot air into the evaporator group, the pipes or the cab
L.P. normal - H.P. normal • Hot air circulating in the heating group
• Formation of ice on the evaporator
• Normal condition with very high ambient temperature (higher than 43°C)
• Excess coolant (30 – 35% more)
• Overheating of condenser
L.P. high - H.P. high
• Air present in the unit
• Obstruction in the H.P. line between the compressor and the condenser-filler tube,
behind the measurement point of the H.P.
• Normal condition with very low temperature (lower than 5°C)
• Lack of coolant (70 – 75% less) (probable leakages)
L.P. normal or low - H.P. low • Obstruction in the H.P. line between the compressor and the condenser-filler tube,
before the measurement point of the H.P.
• Compressor belt missing
L.P. roughly equal to H.P. • Electromagnetic pulley that slips or does not engage
EMPTYING THE AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-71 1

1. Connect the maintenance station M1 to service valves b and c and
follow the specific maintenance station instructions relative to the
drainage of the unit.
2. Disconnect the group to be substituted or reconditioned immediate-

ly after switching off the maintenance station. Plug the removed or
disconnected connection tubes tightly and with a minimum of de-
lay.
3. Carefully check the quantity of anti-freeze recovered and contained

in the disassembled parts, since the same quantity must be replaced
when the air-conditioning unit is filled.
20-72 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT AXLE
FRONT
12 AXLE
Wheel vibration; front tire resistance; half shaft breakage.
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test phas-
Defective axle
es
Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
No differential action; jamming while steering.
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Steering is difficult; vehicle goes straight while trying to turn it.
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Excess noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Incorrect wheel adjustment Verify group integrity and wheel side bearings
Contamination in the axle box or incorrect assembly Look for foreign particles. Check for proper assembly of the various
of parts parts of the axle.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-73 1

12
Uneven wear of tires
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Blocked half shaft:
• Abnormal functioning of the differential or • Verify assembly of all components
breakage/blockage of control device.
• Vehicles with wide steering angle may proceed • Reduce the steering angle to minimum and decelerate when the
with kicks, have steering difficulty or cause vehicle begins to kick.
pneumatic wear on sharp turns.
Friction noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Check the condition of the ring gear, pinion gear, bearings, etc. Re-
Damaged or worn out axle parts
place when necessary.
Incorrect adjustment of bevel gear set.
Parts of the transmission worn out. Replace or adjust as required.
(transmission gears, U joint, etc.)
Vibration during forward drive, intermittent noise

CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
20-74 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Noise while driving
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive backlash between pinion and ring gear Adjust
Worn out pinion and ring gear Replace
Worn out pinion bearings Replace
Pinion bearings loose Adjust
Excessive axial pinion backlash Adjust
Worn out differential bearings Replace
Differential bearings loose Adjust
Ring gear out of round Replace
Low oil level Oil level
Poor or worn oil Replace
Bent half shaft Replace
Noise while driving in neutral

CAUSES REMEDY
Noises coming from axle are usually heard but not
Replace or adjust (see above)
loud when vehicle moves in neutral gear.
Incorrect backlash between pinion and ring
(sound heard while decelerating, disappears while Replace
increasing speed)
Pinion or input flange worn out Adjust
Intermittent noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear damaged Replace bevel gear set
Differential box bolts loosened Tighten to torque
Constant noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear teeth or pinion damaged Replace bevel gear set
Worn out bearings Replace
Pinion spline worn out Replace
Noise while steering

CAUSES REMEDY
Worn out differential gears Replace
Worn out differential box or spider Replace
Differential thrust washers worn out Replace
Half shaft spline worn out Replace
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-75 1

12
Ring gear teeth broken at the outer side
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive gear load compared to the one foreseen Replace bevel gear set
Incorrect gear adjustment (excessive backlash) Carefully follow the recommended operations for the adjustment of
Pinion nut loosened the bevel gear set free backlash.
Ring gear tooth broken

CAUSES REMEDY
Load bump
Replace bevel gear set
Incorrect gear adjustment (insufficient backlash)
Adjust bevel gear set free backlash
Pinion nut loosened
Pinion or ring gear teeth worn

CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; Replace bevel gear set
improper lubrication Carefully follow the recommended operations for the adjustment of
the bevel gear set free play
Worn out pinion bearings Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
recommended schedule.
Overheated ring and pinion teeth

CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature Replace bevel gear set
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
improper lubrication recommended schedule.
Pinion teeth pitting

CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use Replace bevel gear set
Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
Insufficient lubrication recommended schedule.
Axle beam body bent

CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle overloaded
Vehicle accident Replace axle beam body
Load bump
Worn out or pitted bearings

CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil
Excessive use Replace bearings
Normal wear out recommended schedule.
Pinion nut loosened
20-76 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Oil leakage from gaskets and seals
CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature
Oil gasket assembled incorrectly Replace the gasket or seal and matching surface if damaged.
Seal lip damaged recommended schedule.
Contaminated oil
Excessive wearing out of input flange spline

CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use Replace the flange
Pinion nut loosened Check that the pinion spline is not excessively worn
Pinion axle backlash Replace bevel gear set if required
Fatigue failure of pinion teeth

CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use
Continuous overload
Pinion and ring teeth breakage

CAUSES REMEDY
Crash load of differential components Check and/or replace other differential components
Side gear spline worn out

CAUSES REMEDY
Replace differential gear group.
Excessive use
Replace half shaft if required
Thrust washer surface worn out or scratched

CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; recommended schedule.
improper lubrication Replace all scratched washers and those with 0.1 mm smaller thick-
ness than the new ones
Inner diameter of tapered roller bearing worn out

CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use axial pinion Replace bearing.
Excessive pinion axial backlash Check pinion axial backlash
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil recommended schedule.
Bent or broken half shaft or half shaft broken at wheel side

CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle intensively operated or overloaded
Replace
Wheel support loosened
Check that wheel support is not worn out or incorrectly adjusted.
Beam body bent
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-77 1

TROUBLESHOOTING REAR AXLE
REAR
12 AXLE
Wheel vibration; front tire resistance; half shaft breakage.
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Steering is difficult; vehicle goes straight while trying to turn it.

CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
No differential action; jamming while steering.

CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Excess noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
20-78 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Uneven wear of tires
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Blocked half shaft:
• Abnormal functioning of the differential or • Verify assembly of all components
breakage/blockage of control device.
• Vehicles with wide steering angle may proceed • Reduce the steering angle to minimum and decelerate when the
with kicks, have steering difficulty or cause vehicle begins to kick.
pneumatic wear on sharp turns.
Friction noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
Check the condition of the ring gear, pinion gear, bearings, etc. Re-
Damaged or worn out axle parts
place when necessary.
Incorrect adjustment of bevel gear set.
Parts of the transmission worn out. Replace or adjust as required.
(transmission gears, U joint, etc.)
Vibration during forward drive, intermittent noise

CAUSES REMEDY
Defective axle
es
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-79 1

12
Noise while driving
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive backlash between pinion and ring gear Adjust
Worn out pinion and ring gear Replace
Worn out pinion bearings Replace
Pinion bearings loose Adjust
Excessive axial pinion backlash Adjust
Worn out differential bearings Replace
Differential bearings loose Adjust
Ring gear out of round Replace
Low oil level Oil level
Poor or worn oil Replace
Noise while driving in neutral

CAUSES REMEDY
Noises coming from axle are usually heard but not
Replace or adjust (see above)
loud when vehicle moves in neutral gear.
Incorrect backlash between pinion and ring
(sound heard while decelerating, disappears while Replace
increasing speed)
Pinion or input flange worn out Adjust
Intermittent noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear damaged Replace bevel gear set
Differential box bolts loosened Tighten to torque
Constant noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear teeth or pinion damaged Replace bevel gear set
Worn out bearings Replace
Pinion spline worn out Replace
Noise while steering

CAUSES REMEDY
Worn out differential gears Replace
Worn out differential box or spider Replace
Differential thrust washers worn out Replace
Half shaft spline worn out Replace
20-80 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Ring gear teeth broken at the outer side
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive gear load compared to the one foreseen Replace bevel gear set
Incorrect gear adjustment (excessive backlash) Carefully follow the recommended operations for the adjustment of
Pinion nut loosened the bevel gear set free backlash.
Ring gear tooth broken

CAUSES REMEDY
Load bump
Incorrect gear adjustment (insufficient backlash)
Adjust bevel gear set free backlash
Pinion nut loosened
Pinion or ring gear teeth worn

CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; Replace bevel gear set
improper lubrication Carefully follow the recommended operations for the adjustment of
the bevel gear set free play
Worn out pinion bearings Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
recommended schedule.
Overheated ring and pinion teeth

CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature Replace bevel gear set
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
improper lubrication recommended schedule.
Pinion teeth pitting

CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use Replace bevel gear set
Insufficient lubrication recommended schedule.
Axle beam body bent

CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle overloaded
Vehicle accident Replace axle beam body
Load bump
Worn out or pitted bearings

CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil
Excessive use Replace bearings
Normal wear out recommended schedule.
Pinion nut loosened
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-81 1

12
Oil leakage from gaskets and seals
CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature
Oil gasket assembled incorrectly Replace the gasket or seal and matching surface if damaged.
Seal lip damaged recommended schedule.
Contaminated oil
Excessive wearing out of input flange spline

CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use Replace the flange
Pinion nut loosened Check that the pinion spline is not excessively worn
Pinion axle backlash Replace bevel gear set if required
Fatigue failure of pinion teeth

CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use
Continuous overload
Pinion and ring teeth breakage

CAUSES REMEDY
Crash load of differential components Check and/or replace other differential components
Side gear spline worn out

CAUSES REMEDY
Replace differential gear group.
Excessive use
Replace half shaft if required
Thrust washer surface worn out or scratched

CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; recommended schedule.
improper lubrication Replace all scratched washers and those with 0.1 mm smaller thick-
ness than the new ones
Inner diameter of tapered roller bearing worn out

CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use axial pinion Replace bearing.
Excessive pinion axial backlash Check pinion axial backlash
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil recommended schedule.
Bent or broken half shaft or half shaft broken at wheel side

CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle intensively operated or overloaded
Replace
Wheel support loosened
Check that wheel support is not worn out or incorrectly adjusted.
Beam body bent
20-82 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TROUBLESHOOTING TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
12
Vehicle does not move

CAUSES REMEDY
Faulty supply to solenoid valves Check/Replace
Damaged wiring connections between transmission
Repair/Replace
and vehicle
Oxidized contacts in electrical wiring Clean
Break in electrical cable Replace
Damaged solenoids Replace
Damaged sensors Replace
Short circuits or open connections Check/replace fuses
Incorrect oil level Fill oil to proper level
Check for leaks Repair
Blocked intake filter Clean
Damaged oil pump Replace
Damaged oil pump relief valve Replace oil pump
Blocked/damaged transmission filter Replace
Damaged/jammed control valve Replace
Damaged converter Replace
Oil temperature below 0°C Wait for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Damaged rotary seals Replace
Damaged synchronizers Replace
Blocked reverse lever Repair
Worn clutch Replace/repair clutch
No drive transmission
Check/Repair/Replace
(broken gears, shafts, bearings, etc.)
Vehicle has reduced power transmission

CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect oil temperature Wait for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Transmission oil overheating See "Overheating"
Check hydraulic circuit and replace
Incorrect operating pressure
(oil pump, filters, control valve)
Incorrect oil level Fill oil to proper level
Worn clutch Replace/Repair
4WD clutch failure Repair/Replace 4WD shaft group
Overheating solenoids Replace
Damaged transmission and vehicle wiring connec-
Repair/Replace
tions
Damaged sensors Replace
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-83 1

12
Overheating
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged hydraulic cooling system Repair
Dirty heat exchanger Clean
Parking brake inadvertently activated Release
Excessive dirt on axle wheel hubs Clean
Seizing (broken gears, shafts, bearings, etc.) Check/Repair/Replace
Braking force outside transmission:
Check/Repair axle
irregular axle operation
Clutch plate drag Repair/Replace
Damaged oil thermostat Replace
Incorrect oil level Add oil
Worn oil pump Replace
Wheels rotate when vehicle is raised

CAUSES REMEDY
Clutch plate drag Repair/Replace
Low oil temperature (high oil viscosity) Wail for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Incorrect oil specifications Replace oil and filters
Damaged control valve Replace
Faulty reverser locking Repair/Replace
Noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged oil pump Replace
Aeration/Cavitation Check oil level
Seizing (broken gears, shafts, bearings, etc.) Check/Repair/Replace
Worn clutch plates Replace
Irregular actuation
CAUSES REMEDY
Electrical system fault Repair/Replace
Worn clutch plates Replace
Low oil temperature (high oil viscosity) Wail for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Overheating See "Overheating"
Damaged hydraulic system Repair/Replace
20-84 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
Gear remains engaged
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged/jammed shuttle shaft lever Repair/Replace
Damaged hydraulic system Repair/Replace
Damaged clutch Repair/Replace
Damaged gear lever rod Replace
Damaged synchronizer Replace
No 4WD power transmission

CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged 4WD clutch Replace
Hydraulic system fault Repair/Replace
Faulty brake sensor Check/Replace
Gear shift will not engage

CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged shifter Replace
Damaged synchronizer Replace
WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-85 1

12
20-86 1 WB140-2N WB150-2N

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
METHOD OF USING THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6

REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION OF PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
PRECAUTIONS DURING SERVICE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
REMOVAL PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
ENGINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
CRANKSHAFT DAMPER AND PULLEY ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
ENGINE OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
ENGINE OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
FRONT AND REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
FRONT END LOADER CYLINDER LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
LOCKING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
STARTER, ALTERNATOR AND COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17
BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-18
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-18
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-18
FRONT COUNTERWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
RADIATOR, CONDENSER AND OIL COOLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-1 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TABLE OF CONTENTS
REFRIGERANT CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
MUFFLER AND EXHAUST STACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
EXHAUST STACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-27
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-27
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-27
ENGINE HOOD AND OPERATORS CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
ENGINE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29
OPERATORS CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
AIR CONDITIONING AND HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-36
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-36
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-37
FUEL AND HYDRAULIC OIL TANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-38
FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-38
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-38
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-39
HYDRAULIC TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-42
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-42
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-47
PISTON PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-49
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-53
TORQUE CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
STEERING COLUMN AND COLUMN CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
30-2 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

COLUMN CONTROL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-56

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-56
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-56
MASTER BRAKE CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-57
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-57
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-57
FRONT END LOADER CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-58
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-58
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-58
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-61
STEERING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-62
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-62
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-62
TOE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-64
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-66
WHEEL HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
OUTER PLANETARY DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
PLANETARY GEARS REPLACEMENT (IF NECESSARY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
OUTER PLANETARY ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
INNER WHEEL HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-68
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-68
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70
STEERING KNUCKLE AND AXLE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-72
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-72
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-73
AXLE HOUSING ENDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-74
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-74
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-75
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER (CARRIER SET UP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-76
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-76
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-77
RING AND PINION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-78
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-78
PINION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-79
RING GEAR DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-81
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-81
PINION SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-82
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-82
CHECKING GEAR BACK LASH AND INSTALLING CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-85
CHECKING BACK LASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-85
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-88
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-88
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-89
OUTER PLANETARY REDUCTION GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-90
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-90
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-91
INNER WHEEL HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-92
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-3 2

DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-92
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-93
AXLE HOUSING AND BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-96
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-96
BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-99
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-99
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-105
BRAKE AND AXLE HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-107
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-107
RING GEAR AND CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-112
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-112
PINION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-112
PINION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-115
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-118
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-118
RING AND PINION SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-119
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-119
FRONT BUCKET BOOM CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-126
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-126
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-127
FRONT BUCKET TILT CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-128
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-128
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-129
FRONT BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-130
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-130
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-131
FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-132
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-132
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-133
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-134
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-134
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-135
BACKHOE BOOM CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-136
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-136
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-136
BACKHOE ARM CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-138
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-138
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-139
TELESCOPIC ARM CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-140
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-140
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-141
BACKHOE BUCKET CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-142
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-142
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-143
OUTRIGGER CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-144
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-144
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-145
BACKHOE SWING CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-146
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-146
30-4 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-147
CYLINDERS (FRONT BUCKET RAISE AND TILT, BOOM, ARM, OUTRIGGERS, AND
TELESCOPIC ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-148
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-148
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-150
CYLINDER (BOOM SWING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-154
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-154
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-155
BOOM SAFETY CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-158
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-158
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-159
BACKHOE WORK EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-160
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-160
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-161
BACKHOE BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-162
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-162
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-162
BACKHOE ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-164
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-164
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-165
TELESCOPIC ARM (COMPLETE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-166
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-166
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-167
INNER ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-168
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-168
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-169
INNER ARM GUIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-170
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-170
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-170
BACKHOE BOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-172
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-172
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-173
BACKHOE SWING BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-174
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-174
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-175
BACKHOE OUTRIGGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-176
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-176
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-177
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-5 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY METHOD OF USING THIS MANUAL
METHOD OF USING THIS MANUAL
REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION OF PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES

A. When removing or installing any parts or unit assemblies, the order of work and techniques used are given for
removal operations. The order for installation operations is not given unless specified.
B. Any special techniques applying only to the installation procedures are marked The same mark is placed after
the relevant step in the removal procedure to indicate which step in the installation procedure it applies to.
Example Explanation
(COMPONENT) REMOVAL Title of operation
WARNING
Safety precaution to be observed when performing an operation.
1.XXX Text of or name of procedural step.
A. Text of procedural step if (1) was procedural name.
★ Technique or important point.
Reference to a special technique during assembly or installation. (note that this

symbol is right-aligned)
(COMPONENT) INSTALLATION Title of operation

• Installation is the reverse of
Overall directive
removal
Special technique during assembly or installation (note that this symbol is left-
aligned)
Specifications.
Recovery of oil, lubricants and coolant quantities.
1. General precautions when carrying out installation or removal (disassembly or assembly) of units given together as PRE-
CAUTIONS WHEN CARRYING OUT OPERATION, be sure to follow these precautions when performing the opera-
tion.
2. List of special tools: For details of the description, part number and quantity of any tools that appear in the operation pro-
cedure, See “SPECIAL TOOLS” on page 30-8..
Remark
A procedure that must be observed when performing a certain operation.
30-6 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS DURING SERVICE OR REPAIR OPERA-
12
PRECAUTIONS DURING SERVICE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS
When dissembling, assembling or installing a part or component, always follow these listed general rules of safety. Failure to
do so may result in damage to the system being repaired or injury to the technician doing the repair.
REMOVAL PRECAUTIONS
• Unless indicated otherwise, always lower all work equipment down until it rests firmly on the ground.
• Always trap and recycle all coolants and oils. Be sure your containers are large enough.
• Cap, cover or plug any openings to prevent dirt or debris from entering when you remove a component or part.
• Before removing a cylinder, secure the ram in a retracted position.
• Before removing or disassembling any parts, mark the order in which they came apart.
• When removing hydraulic couplings, always support the line or hose you are removing it from to avoid twisting or kink-
ing the line.
• When removing any lines always tag the line with a reference tag or mark as to where it is to be installed.
• When using eye bolts to lift an item be sure the eye bolt is installed all the way in the part you will be lifting.
• When removing a part in a wet attachment, be sure you have the proper drain pans to catch any residual fluids.
• Keep your work area clean and organized at all times.
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
• Always use the specified torque when tighten nuts or bolts. Never dry torque a fastener, always lubricate the fastener
before torquing it.
• Never use impact tools to start a nut or bolt. Always start nuts and bolts by hand first.
• Secure all cotter keys according to the instructions listed.
• When using adhesives on surfaces or fasteners, be sure the surface is clean and free of oil, dirt or grease.
• Clean all parts before installing them.
• Be sure snap rings are installed correctly and firmly in place.
• When installing a component always follow the tightening pattern for multiple fasteners.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-7 2

SPECIAL TOOLS
Procedure Symbol Code Description Q.ty Notes
ATR200620
Cylinder disassembly
1 See Attachment 1
and assembly
960119000
Plunger 40 2
Hydraulic
Plunger 45 2
press Assembly cylinder
2
Commercially and ram bushings
Plunger 50 2
available
Plunger 75 2
See
Bushing 1
960117005 To calibrate piston
3
shims
See
Bushing support 1
960117006
Notched wrench for cylinders 70 1

4 Disassembly and
Commercially
Notched wrench for cylinders 95 1 assembly of cylinder
available
gland nut
Notched wrench for cylinders 115 120 1
5 Notched wrench for boom cylinders 1

Disassembly and
A
assembly of cylinder Disassembly ring nut
boom cylinder
6 ATR200300 Notched wrench 1
Boom swing head
disassembly-assembly
Socket wrench (6-point 46) 1

Commercially Removal - installation
7 Socket wrench (6-point 55) 1
available of piston
Socket wrench (6-point 65) 1
Plunger 40 1
Hydraulic
Plunger 50 1
press
8 Dust seal assembly
Commercially
Plunger 55 1
available
Plunger 60 1
Expander 70 1
Expander 80 1
See Expander 85 1
960117002
9 Expander 95 1 Piston gasket assembly
960117003
960030002 Expander 100 1
Expander 110 1
Expander 115 1
30-8 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

Procedure Symbol Code Description Q.ty Notes
Bushing for ram 40 1

See
10 Bushing for ram 50 1 Gland assembly on ram
960117001

Disassembly and
A
assembly of cylinder Bushing for ram 80 1

See Piston-cylinder assem-
11 Bushing for ram 95 1
960117004 bly
Commercially
Air conditioning unit B 1 Recycle station 1 Recycle refrigerant
available
1 CA715027 Plunger 1
2 CA119030 Wrench 1
3 CA119099 Wrench 1
4 CA715022 Wrench 1
6 CA715023 False pinion 1

Measure shim for pin-
ion
7 CA119206 False differential holder 1
8 CA1191182 Ring nut 1
Disassembly and
assembly of C 11 CA715087 Plunger 1
front axel
Disassembly and 1 CA715027 Plunger 1

assembly of E
rear axel 2 CA715265 Wrench 1
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-9 2

3 CA119099 Wrench 1
4 CA715022 Wrench 1
5 CA715380 Kit 1
6 CA715128 False pinion 1
7 CA715388 False differential box 1
Disassembly and
E
assembly of rear axel 11 CA119033 Interchangeable handle 1
12 CA715056 Kit 1
13 CA715055 Kit 1
30-10 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ENGINE COMPONENTS
ENGINE COMPONENTS
Remark
As for removal, installation, disassembly and assembly of engine components (see the "ENGINE SHOP MANUAL".
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY
CRANKSHAFT DAMPER AND PULLEY ASSEMBLY
ENGINE OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY
ENGINE OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY
FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
FRONT AND REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY
GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY
THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY
WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-11 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT END LOADER CYLINDER LOCK
FRONT END LOADER CYLINDER LOCK

For removal and installation of components under the engine hood that cannot be easily accessed without raising the front end
loader. In order to remove, install or service these components the front end loader must be raised and properly secured in
place. Failure to do so may result in injury or even death to the technician performing these procedures.
LOCKING PROCEDURES
In illustration (A) the front end loader cylinder lock (1) must be
used any time you will be performing maintenance on the machine
with the front end loader raised. To use the cylinder lock:
1. In illustration (B) remove the cylinder lock assembly pin (2)

holding on to the lock unit (1).
2. Using both hands lower the lock unit (1) down from it’s storage
position and remove it from the lift arm.
3. Raise the front end loader unit completely in the air extending
the lifting cylinders.
4. Install the cylinder lock (1) in the position shown in illustration

(A), keeping the safety pin boss against the lift cylinder gland
nut.
5. Insert the safety pin (2) completely into the pre-drilled holes
and lock the pin in place with the smaller pin provided.
6. Slowly lower the front end loader unit until it makes contact
with the cylinder lock.
7. Check to be sure the cylinder lock is secularly in place before

proceeding with any procedures under the front end loader.
30-12 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY STARTER, ALTERNATOR AND COMPRESSOR
12
STARTER, ALTERNATOR AND COMPRESSOR
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. With the front end loader raised and secured in place, stop the
engine and set the parking brake.
2. Cut off the electrical supply to the system using the main electrical
disconnect switch (1).
3. To disconnect the electrical supply, turn the battery disconnect

switch counter-clockwise. To reconnect the electrical supply turn
the switch clockwise
WARNING! Never remove or service the starter

without disconnecting the electrical
supply. If your machine is not
equipped with a main electrical dis-
connect switch, disconnect the nega-
tive (-) battery terminal first.
4. Disconnect the electrical wiring (3) and tag the wires.
5. Loosen the two bolts (4) holding the starter in place and
carefully remove the starter motor (5)
Remark
Do not let the starter hang by the wiring harness, damage to
the wiring may result. Remove the wiring first before removing
the starter motor.
INSTALLATION
• Carry out installation in the reverse order of removal.
Starter motor mounting bolts 80 Nm (60 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-13 2

ALTERNATOR
REMOVAL
2. Cut off the electrical supply to the system using the main electrical
disconnect switch (1).
3. To disconnect the electrical supply, turn the battery disconnect

switch counter-clockwise. To reconnect the electrical supply turn
the switch clockwise.
WARNING! Never remove or service the alternator

without disconnecting the electrical
supply. If your machine is not
equipped with a main electrical dis-
connect switch, disconnect the nega-
tive (-) battery terminal first.
4. Disconnect the exciter cable (3), the connector (4) and (5)
5. Loosen adjustment bolt (6) and mounting (8).

★ Loosening these fasteners will leave the alternator (9) free to
move.
30-14 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

6. Loosen bolt (8) and remove bolt (6).
7. Push the alternator (9) toward the engine to remove belt (10).
8. Once the belt (10) is off the alternator, remove support bolt (7) and
lift alternator (9) from the mounting boss.
INSTALLATION
★ Adjust the fan belt tension. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-15 2

REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR
• This procedure is only for machines equipped with an air condition-
ing system.
WARNING! Do not discharge refrigerant into the

open atmosphere, doing so is in viola-
tion of the law and could produce
dangerous gasses if exposed to an
open flame.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the fan guard (1)
3. Before preceding with any removal procedures, it is important to

capture and recycle all the refrigerant from the system first.
Remove caps (2) and (3) and install the recycling machine.
4. Disconnect electrical connector from compressor (7).
5. Loosen idler pulley bolt (5) and remove belt (6) from compressor.
6. Once the system is completely discharged, remove bolt (8) from

bracket (9). Once the suction and delivery lines (10) and (11) are
removed, cap the ends to prevent moisture from entering the sys-
tem.
30-16 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

7. Remove the front mounting bolts (12) and rear nuts (13).
8. Carefully lift the compressor (7) from the mounting boss along with
the heat shield (14)
INSTALLATION
★ Adjust the compressor belt tension. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
Idler pulley mounting bolt 123 Nm (91 lbf ft)
Compressor mounting bolts 32 Nm (24 lbf ft)
Refrigerant (R134a) quantity 975 g (35 oz)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-17 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH

REMOVAL
1. To remove or replace the battery disconnect switch, raise the front

end loader and secure it in place. See “FRONT END LOADER
CYLINDER LOCK” on page 30-12.
2. Remove the battery cover (1) from the fuel tank (2) housing.
3. Loosen the battery hold down (3) and move the battery (4) out-
wards. Lift the protective flap (5) if needed.
4. Remove the negative (-) terminal clamp first and then the positive
(+) terminal clamp next.
WARNING! It is important that the negative (-) bat-

tery terminal clamp is removed first.
Doing so will prevent the chance of a
short to ground causing sparks.
5. Once the battery is completely disconnected, open the engine hood

and remove the mounting bolts (6) that secure the switch (7) to the
frame.
6. Turn the switch (7) over and remove the cables (9) and (10)
★ Make a note of the cable attachment locations.
INSTALLATION
1. When installing the battery cables, hook the positive (+) cable up
first then the negative (-) cable next. Adjust the engine hood guide
(11).
WARNING! It is important that the positive (+) bat-

tery terminal clamp is installed first.
30-18 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT COUNTERWEIGHT
FRONT COUNTERWEIGHT
REMOVAL
1. To remove or replace the front counterweight, raise the front end

loader and secure it in place. See “FRONT END LOADER CYL-
INDER LOCK” on page 30-12.
2. Loosen the front mounting bolts (1) slightly first. Using a forklift,
position the forks into the openings on the counterweight (2).
3. Tilt the forks back slightly and remove the mounting bolts (1) and
washers (3) carefully.
WARNING! When performing this operation, stand

clear of the counterweight in case it
should slip off the forks.
4. Remove the counterweight (2) carefully.
Counterweight: 150 to 450 kg (331-992 lb)
INSTALLATION
Counterweight mounting bolts 330 Nm (243 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-19 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY RADIATOR, CONDENSER AND OIL COOLERS
RADIATOR, CONDENSER AND OIL COOLERS

To remove or replace the radiator, condenser or oil coolers raise the front end loader and secure it in place. See “FRONT END
LOADER CYLINDER LOCK” on page 30-12.
RADIATOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine hood and gas struts (1) first. See “ENGINE
HOOD AND OPERATORS CAB” on page 30-28.
2. Drain and capture all engine coolant and recycle.
WARNING! Do not dump engine coolants down

the drain, on to the ground or into a
body of water, doing so is in violation
of the law.
Engine coolant: 18 liters (4.75 gal)
3. Remove fan guard (2), disconnect horn (4) and remove

wiring (3).
4. Remove air filter intake duct (5)
5. On machines equipped with air conditioning, capture and recycle

refrigerants first, then remove lines (6) and (7). Cap both lines
immediately.

open flame.
30-20 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

6. Remove recovery tank (8)
7. Disconnect upper radiator hose (10) and lower radiator hose (11)
from radiator (9)
8. Remove support brackets (12) on both sides.
9. Loosen oil cooler hoses (13) and (14) to allow hydraulic oil to drain
from cooler. When cooler is empty, remove hoses and cap or plug
the ends.
10. Remove plug (16) and drain the transmission oil cooler (17). When
completely drained, disconnect the hoses (18) and cap or plug the
ends.
11. Disconnect the fan shroud (19) from the radiator (9) and slide the
shroud towards the engine.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-21 2

12. Remove the support nuts (20) and the rubber grommets.
13. Remove the radiator and oil cooler (9) as a unit.
INSTALLATION
★ Refill the engine coolant.
Coolant refill amount: 18 liters (4.75 gal)
1. Re-charge the air conditioning system.
★ Check or add hydraulic oil if needed
★ Check or add transmission fluid if needed
• Once fluid levels are all correct, start the engine and allow it to idle at a low RPM to circulate fluids.
• Bring the engine RPM up to about 1700 RPM for one minute.
• Stop the engine and check for leaks.
30-22 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

REFRIGERANT CONDENSER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine hood and gas struts (1) first. See “ENGINE
HOOD AND OPERATORS CAB” on page 30-28.

open flame.
2. Before preceding with any removal procedures, it is important to

capture and recycle all the refrigerant from the system first.
3. Remove horn (2), wiring (1) from condenser.
4. Once system is completely discharged, remove lines (3) and (4) and
cap them immediately.
5. Loosen mounting bolt (5) on the condenser (6)
6. Loosen mounting bolts (7) and remove them.
7. Remove mounting bolt (5) and lift out the condenser (6).
INSTALLATION
★ Re-charge the air conditioning system.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-23 2

HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER

REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine hood and gas struts first. See “ENGINE HOOD
AND OPERATORS CAB” on page 30-28.
2. Disconnect horn (3) and remove horn and wiring (2).
★ On machines equipped with air conditioning, capture and recy-

cle refrigerants first, then remove lines. Cap both lines immedi-
ately.

open flame.
3. Loosen oil cooler hoses (4) and (5) to allow hydraulic oil to drain
from cooler. When cooler is empty, remove hoses and cap the ends.
4. Remove mounting bolts (7) that hold oil cooler (6) to radiator (8)
5. Remove nuts and washers (9), then remove support mounting (10)
6. Remove the oil cooler (6).
INSTALLATION
★ Check or add hydraulic fluid if needed.

• Once fluid levels are all correct, start the engine and allow it to idle
at a low RPM to circulate fluids.
30-24 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER

REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine hood and gas struts first. See “ENGINE HOOD
AND OPERATORS CAB” on page 30-28.
2. Loosen the clamp (1) from the hose (2) on the radiator (3)
3. Remove the four nuts (4) and remove the oil cooler (5)
INSTALLATION
★ Check or add transmission fluid if needed.
• Once fluid levels are all correct, start the engine and allow it to idle at a low RPM to circulate fluids.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-25 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MUFFLER AND EXHAUST STACK
MUFFLER AND EXHAUST STACK

To remove or replace the muffler raise the front end loader and secure it
in place. as described in See “FRONT END LOADER CYLINDER
LOCK” on page 30-12. To remove exhaust stack the front end loader
does not need to be raised.
MUFFLER
REMOVAL
1. Loosen the exhaust clamp (1) and remove it from the stack pipe (2)
(For WB140-2 only)
★ Remove the four retaining nuts (3) and washers (4).
(For WB150-2 only)
★ Remove mounting bolts (5)
2. Remove the four bolts (6) and remove the complete muffler (7).
INSTALLATION
★ Replace all gaskets with new.
30-26 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MUFFLER AND EXHAUST STACK
EXHAUST STACK
REMOVAL
1. Loosen the exhaust clamp (1) and remove it from the stack pipe (2)
2. Remove the three lower bolts (3) from the pipe flange (4)
3. Holding the exhaust stack (7), remove the last bolt from the mount-
ing.
4. Remove the exhaust stack (7).
INSTALLATION
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-27 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ENGINE HOOD AND OPERATORS CAB
ENGINE HOOD AND OPERATORS CAB
ENGINE HOOD
REMOVAL
1. Open hood (1) and remove safety pins (2), then disconnect gas
struts (3).
2. Raise hood (1) carefully to a vertical position and attach a sling

through the opening at back of the hood.
3. Remove bolts (4) from the bracket and lift hood (1) straight up and
out.
Engine hood: 27 kg (60 lbs)
30-28 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION
★ Check the hood striker (5) alignment. Adjust if necessary.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-29 2

OPERATORS CAB
REMOVAL
WARNING! Be sure all work equipment is lowered to the ground. Turn the electrical supply off
using the disconnect switch. On machines equipped with air conditioning, capture
and recycle all refrigerants before proceeding with any removal procedures.
WARNING! Do not discharge refrigerant into the open atmosphere,

doing so is in violation of the law and could produce dan-
gerous gasses if exposed to an open flame.
1. Disconnect the throttle linkage and accelerator pedal cable (1) from
the injection pump mounting support (2).
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable (4) and the differential lock
tube (5) from the rear axel (3). Cap the opening.
3. Disconnect the brake lines (6) from the rear axle (3).
★ Cap the openings and mark the line locations and lines.
30-30 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

4. Disconnect the steering cylinder hoses (7) from the front axel.
5. Disconnect the steering valve lines (8, 9 and 10) from the valve.
6. Disconnect the transmission connectors (11) and (12) as well as the

ground cable (13).
7. Disconnect the five connectors (14) from the sensor, the speed con-
trol connector (15) and the solenoid connector (16) from the trans-
mission.
8. Disconnect the harness (17) from the grounding stud.
9. Disconnect the connector (18) from the bucket control lever.
10. Disconnect the converter connector (19) from the switch.
11. Disconnect the differential and backhoe solenoid connector (20).
12. Disconnect the power engagement connector (21).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-31 2

13. Disconnect the harness connector (22) from the alarm, (23) from
the rear lights and (24) from the backhoe control.
14. Disconnect the heater core hoses (25) and (26)

cle refrigerants first, then remove lines. Cap both lines immedi-
ately.

open flame.
15. Remove the lower left guard from the bottom of the cab and discon-
nect connector (31) from the fuel level indicator.
16. Remove the floor mat (32) and fender trim piece (33).
★ Push the boot on the shiftier lever (34) down into the trim piece
(33).
30-32 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

17. Remove the outrigger control lever knobs (35) and lift the cover
(36) off the control levers.
18. Remove the self-locking nuts (37) and the four fasteners that secure
the cab in place.
19. Disconnect hoses (38) and (39) from the control valve (40) and cap
all openings.
20. Remove the protective plugs and install two eyebolts "A" into the
threaded holes on the cab.
21. Using the tool shown in the illustration, carefully lift the cab (41)
off the frame.
22. Slowly raise the cab making sure the electrical leads and control
levers clear the chassis frame.
Cab weight: 630 kg (1,389 lbs)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-33 2

INSTALLATION
★ Check the adjustments on throttle, accelerator pedal. For

details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ Check the adjustment of the parking brake lever. For details,

see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ Bleed the air from the brake system. For details, see section 20
"TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ Bleed the air from the steering circuit. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
Cab mounting bolts: 170 Nm (125 lbf ft)
30-34 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-35 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY AIR CONDITIONING AND HEATER
AIR CONDITIONING AND HEATER

Remark
If the machine is not equipped with the optional air conditioning, perform only those operations relating to the heat-
ing unit.
REMOVAL
cle refrigerants first, then proceed with removing the system.

open flame.

of the law.
2. Disconnect the power supply harness connectors (2).
Engine coolant: 18 liters (4.75 gal)
3. Disconnect the ducts (4) from the plenum housing (3).
4. Disconnect heater hoses (5) and (6) and cap hose openings.
5. Disconnect connector (8) from pressure switch (7).
6. Disconnect piping (11) and (12) from expansion valve (9) and dryer
(10). Cap all openings.
30-36 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY AIR CONDITIONING AND HEATER
7. Loosen the dryer support and remove the dryer (10)
★ Cap the openings on the dryer or replace the dryer if exposed to
the atmosphere too long.
8. Remove the four fasteners (13) and remove the unit (3) carefully.
INSTALLATION
★ Top off the engine coolant if needed.
1. Start the engine and check for leaks and system operation.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-37 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FUEL AND HYDRAULIC OIL TANKS
FUEL AND HYDRAULIC OIL TANKS
FUEL TANK
REMOVAL
1. Remove the lower left guard shield (1) from the cab.
2. Remove tank fill cap (2) to facilitate draining the fuel tank if
needed.
3. Remove hose clamp support nut (4) and move hoses out of the way.
4. Remove battery cover (6) from fuel tank (3) housing.
5. Remove the battery cover (1) from the fuel tank (2) housing.
6. Disconnect (13) the fuel level indicator connector (12) and supply
pump connector (14).
7. Loosen the battery hold down (3) and move the battery (4) out-
wards. Lift the protective flap (5) if needed.
8. Remove the negative (-) terminal clamp first and then the positive
(+) terminal clamp next.
WARNING! It is important that the negative (-) bat-

tery terminal clamp is removed first.
9. Remove the battery (8) and store in a well ventilated area.
10. Disconnect the supply and return lines (15) and (16) and cap openings.
★ Mark hose locations and hoses for proper reassembly.
30-38 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

11. Remove bolts (17) and guard (18).
12. Support the fuel tank (3) and remove the four retaining bolts (19).
13. Remove the fuel tank (3) carefully.
Empty fuel tank weight: 74 kg. (164 lbs)
INSTALLATION
Retaining bolts for fuel tank: 120 Nm (89 lbf ft)
★ If fuel tank was drained, a refill would be:
Fuel tank refill, max. 130 liters (34 gal)
1. Bleed air from the fuel circuit then start the engine.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-39 2

HYDRAULIC TANK
REMOVAL
1. Eliminate any residual pressure in the hydraulic system first.
2. Remove the lower right guard (1) and step plate (2).
3. Remove the fill plug (3) and prepare to drain the hydraulic tank (4).
Hydraulic oil: 92 liters (24 gal)
4. Disconnect the lower suction line (5) and hoses (6) from the tank
(1). Cap or plug all openings.
5. Disconnect the upper lines (7), (8) and (9) and remove the check
valve (10) and T- adapter piece (11).
★ Mark hose locations and hoses for proper reassembly.
6. Support the tank (4) and remove the four retaining bolts (12).
7. Carefully remove the tank (4) from the chassis.
Oil tank weight: 77 kg (170 lbs)
30-40 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION
Retaining bolts for oil tank: 120 Nm (89 lbf ft)
★ If tank was drained, a refill would be:
Oil tank refill, max. 92 liters (24 gal)
1. Bleed air from the hydraulic circuit then start the engine. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ Stop the engine and check oil level.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-41 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION

REMOVAL
1. Lower all work equipment to the ground and turn the electrical sup-
ply off.
2. Release any pressure from the systems.
3. Drain the hydraulic oil tank, cooling system and gearbox.
Oil tank, max. 92 liters (24 gal)

Cooling system: 18 liters (4.75 gal)
Gearbox fill: 16 liters (4.25 gal)
★ On machines equipped with air conditioning, capture and recycle refrigerants first, then proceed with disconnecting
the system.

open flame.

of the law.
5. Remove the front end loader. See “FRONT WORKING EQUIP-

MENT” on page 30-132.
6. Remove the engine hood. See “ENGINE HOOD” on page 30-28.
7. Remove the front counterweight. See “FRONT COUNTER-

WEIGHT” on page 30-19.
8. Remove the radiator oil cooler group. See “RADIATOR” on

page 30-20.
9. Lift gearshift boot (3) and disconnect de clutch switch (4). Remove
transmission shiftier lever (5).
10. Disconnect rear drive shaft (7) from transmission (6).
11. Remove the front drive shaft (8).
30-42 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12. Disconnect the suction hose (10) and drain line (11) from the pump
13. Disconnect power increment solenoid.
14. Disconnect the load sensing line (12) and the delivery line (13)
from valve (14). Cap or plug all openings.
15. Disconnect the transmission unit (15), solenoid valve (17), connec-
tors (16), ground strap (18), oil cooler lines (19) and the wiring har-
ness clamps (20). Cap or plug all openings.
16. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (21) and (22).
17. Disconnect cab heater hoses (23) from water pump.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-43 2

18. Disconnect oil pressure sensor (24) and engine stop solenoid (25).
19. Disconnect cable (26) from cold start equipment, cab heater hose
support (27) and fuel tank back-flow line (28)
20. Disconnect the throttle and accelerator cables (29) from the support
(30).
21. Disconnect the fuel lines (32) from the water separator (31) and cap
or plug all openings.
22. Remove the separator.
30-44 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

23. Disconnect starter motor wiring (33) from starter motor (34).
24. Disconnect alternator wiring (35) from alternator (36).
25. On machines equipped with air conditioning, disconnect refrigerant

lines (38) and (39) from compressor (37) and cap or plug all open-
ings.
26. Disconnect wiring harness connectors (40) and (41).
27. Remove support shield (42) and slide it back towards the engine.
28. Disconnect the muffler clamp (1) from the pipe (2).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-45 2

29. Attach a chain hoist to engine bracket (45) and muffler support
(46).
30. Apply slight tension to the chains and measure and adjust them for
a proper lift.
★ The chains should have a total length of approximately 800

mm (32 in) and the difference between chain lengths should be
approximately 53 mm (2 in).
★ The shortest length should be attached to bracket (45)
★ When lifting tension is applied, the distance between chains
should be 200 mm (8 in)
31. Loosen and remove nuts (47) from support grommets (48) and
remove bolts (49).
32. Lift the engine and transmission up and out carefully.
33. Make sure all items listed are disconnected.
Engine and transmission: 740 kg (1,631 lbs)
30-46 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION
1. Fill the hydraulic oil tank, cooling system, and gearbox.
Oil tank, max. 92 liters(24 gal)

Cooling system: 18 liters (4.75 gal)
transmission fill: 16 liters (4.25 gal)
★ If equipped with air conditioning, re-charge the air conditioning system.
Counterweight bolts: 330 Nm (243 lbf ft)
Transmission bolts: 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)
★ Use Loctite 262 on the transmission bolts.
Nut on axel side: 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)
★ Fill the pump housing and lines. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ Bleed the air from the fuel system.
Nut on vibration grommets: 175 Nm (129 lbf ft)
2. Start the engine, bleed the fuel system and check for leaks in all systems.
3. Stop the engine and check the fluid levels.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-47 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PISTON PUMP
PISTON PUMP
REMOVAL
ply off.
3. Drain the hydraulic tank.
Hydraulic oil: 92 liters (24 gal)
4. Disconnect suction hose (2) and drain line (3) from piston pump
5. Disconnect delivery line (4) and load sensing signal line (5). Cap or
plug all openings.
6. Disconnect solenoid connector (6).
7. Remove the drive shaft (7).
8. Support the pump assembly (1) with a jack.
9. Remove two mounting bolts (8) and then carefully remove pump
(1).
10. Discard o-ring (9) and replace with new.
Pump: 40 kg (88 lbs)
30-48 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PISTON PUMP
INSTALLATION
1. Fill the hydraulic oil tank, cooling system and gearbox.
Suction flange fasteners: 100 Nm (74 lbf ft)

Delivery flange fasteners: 60 Nm (44 lbf ft)
★ Fasteners on transmission side use Loctite 292
Transmission side fasteners: 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)

Nut on axel side: 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)
★ Fasteners on pump mounting use Loctite 292
Pump retaining fasteners: 220 Nm (163 lbf ft)
2. Start the engine to circulate hydraulic oil through the system.
3. Stop the engine and check for leaks.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-49 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
REMOVAL
ply off.
3. Drain the hydraulic oil tank and gearbox.

Transmission fill: 16 liters (4.25 gal)
4. Remove the piston pump. See “PISTON PUMP” on page 30-48.
5. Lift the gearshift boot (1) and disconnect connector (2) from the
dialectic switch. Remove the gear shift lever (3).
6. Remove fill tube (4) from gearbox.
7. Remove drive shaft (5).
★ Mark the flex plate and flywheel with a location point.
8. Remove cover (6) and six retaining bolts (7) from flex plate (8) and
flywheel.
9. Disconnect connectors (9) from the solenoids and temperature sen-

sor (10).
10. Disconnect the four tubes (11) and the controls.
30-50 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

11. Remove support shield (12) and slide it back towards the engine.
12. Attach the engine-transmission group to a chain hoist using bracket

(13) and muffler support (14). Apply tension to the chain and lift
engine slightly
13. Remove nuts (15), bolts (16), and rubber grommets (17)
14. Remove transmission support (18) and attach support brackets "C".
15. Using lifting tool "B" and spacers "A" secure the transmission in
place with mountings "C".
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-51 2

16. Remove the twelve bell housing bolts (19).
17. Carefully slide transmission (20) back and lower it until it is all the
way down on the jack.
Transmission: 230 kg (508 lbs)
30-52 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION

through
★ Use Loctite 262 on all the bolts relating to the transmission.
Lever mounting bolts: 120 Nm (89 lbf ft)

Bolts on transmission side: 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)
Flex plate bolts: 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)
Mounting grommet bolts: 175 Nm (129 lbf ft)
Transmission support bolts: 90 Nm (66 lbf ft)
Transmission bell housing bolts: 90 Nm (66 lbf ft)
1. Start the engine and check or bleed the systems.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-53 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
REMOVAL
1. Lower all work equipment to the ground and turn the electrical supply off.
3. Drain the hydraulic oil tank and gearbox.

4. Remove the piston pump. See “PISTON PUMP” on page 30-48.
5. Remove the transmission. See “TRANSMISSION” on page 30-50.
6. Carefully slide the converter (1) off the transmission (2) input shaft.
INSTALLATION
★ When installing the converter on to the input shaft, rotate the converter to the right then left while holding it square
with the shaft until it slides in place. Be sure it is seated in the bell housing.
★ Do not force the converter into the transmission housing, damage to the front pump may result. Once the converter is
in place, retain it in place to keep it from falling out transmission.
.

Remark
If you will be using a new or rebuilt converter, be sure to fill the converter with transmission fluid before
installing it in to the transmission.
30-54 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY STEERING COLUMN AND COLUMN CONTROLS
12
STEERING COLUMN AND COLUMN CONTROLS
STEERING COLUMN
REMOVAL
1. Lower all work equipment to the ground and release all residual
hydraulic pressure from the system.
2. Turn the battery disconnect switch to the off position.
3. Disconnect the five supply lines (2) from the steering valve (1). Cap
or plug any openings.
★ Be sure to tag or mark line locations as they relate to the valve.
4. Remove instrument panel cover (3).
5. Raise the column boot (4) and disconnect the connectors (5) and (6)
6. Disconnect relays (7) and (8).
7. Remove the steering column bolts (9) and remove the complete
steering unit (9).
INSTALLATION
1. Start the engine and bleed the air from the system.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-55 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY STEERING COLUMN AND COLUMN CONTROLS
COLUMN CONTROL SWITCHES

REMOVAL
2. Raise column boot (1) and disconnect connectors (2) and (3).
3. Remove right cover (4) that hold switches (5) and (6).
4. Disconnect clamp (7) that holds the switches in place.
5. Remove horn button (8), then steering wheel nut and washer (9).
6. Remove steering wheel (10).
7. Remove switches (5) and (6) complete with there protective sleeve.
INSTALLATION
★ Be sure to align the directional control switch properly.
Steering wheel nut: 40 Nm (30 lbf ft)
30-56 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MASTER BRAKE CYLINDER
MASTER BRAKE CYLINDER

REMOVAL
2. Remove cap (1) from master cylinder (2) and siphon brake fluid
from the reservoir.
3. Disconnect the connector (3).
4. Remove the reservoir (2).
5. Remove the retaining clip (4) that holds the delivery lines (5) in place.
6. Disconnect the brake lines (5) from the master cylinder (6).
7. Remove four mounting bolts (7) and carefully remove master cylinders (6).
★ If only one master cylinder is to be removed, disconnect pressure equalizing line (8).
INSTALLATION
★ Bleed the air from the braking system.
1. Adjust pedal rods (9) to allow full return of the master cylinder pis-
ton
2. Be sure pedal adjustments (10) are set equally.
3. Start the engine and operate the machine to test the brakes.
Pipe fitting: 20 Nm (15 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-57 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT END LOADER CONTROL VALVE
FRONT END LOADER CONTROL VALVE

REMOVAL
ply off.
3. Remove floor mat (1) and slide lever boots (2), (3), and (4) up.
4. Remove bolts (5) and trim panel (6).
5. Disconnect control rods (8) from control valve (7).
6. Disconnect control valve supply and delivery lines (9), (10), (11),
load sensing line (12), and steering line (13). Cap or plug all open-
ings.
★ Be sure to tag or mark line locations and valve body locations
for reassembly.
7. Remove the four control valve retaining bolts.
8. Remove the control valve (7).
INSTALLATION
1. Start the engine and bleed the system.
30-58 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT END LOADER CONTROL VALVE
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-59 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL
1. Start engine and use the front bucket to raise the machine and front
wheels.
2. Place two stands "A" and some blocks beneath the chassis.
3. Slowly lower the machine onto the blocks, checking that the
wheels remain at least 5 cm (2 in) above the ground.
WARNING! Fully raise the front working equipment

and engage the safety stop, also secure
the backhoe.
4. Engage the parking brake.
5. Stop the engine and eliminate residual pressure from all circuits.
For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
WARNING! Disconnect the cable from battery

negative terminal (-).
6. Remove the front wheels (1).
Wheel: 65 kg (143 lbs)
7. Remove front guard (2). (For details, See “FRONT COUNTER-

WEIGHT” on page 30-19.).
8. Disconnect drive shaft (4) from axle (3).
9. Disconnect lines (5) from the steering cylinder and plug them to
prevent entry of impurities.
10. Disconnect lubrication tube (6) for axle oscillation pin (7).
11. Position a jack "B" and some blocks "C" beneath the axle. Raise
the jack until the blocks under axle arms (3).
★ It should be possible to lower the jack 10 cm (4 in) in order to
disengage axle from the fulcrum supports.
30-60 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12. Take out the nut and remove retaining bolt (8) of axle pivot pin (7).
13. Install an eyebolt into the central hole of axle pivot pin (7). Extract
the axle pin.
14. Lower the jack until axle is disengaged.
15. Extract the entire axle (3).
Front axle: 316 kg (697 lbs)
INSTALLATION
Nuts for front wheels: 350 Nm (258 lbf ft)
Front closing screws: 300 Nm (221 lbf ft)
★ Bleed the air from the Load Sensing circuit. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
Axle oscillation pin - bushings: ASL800050
1. Check oil level in the tank and start the engine.
2. Perform a few steering manoeuvres in both directions to bleed air from the steering circuit.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-61 2

STEERING CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove tie rod end (3) nut from steering knuckle and press tie rod
end from the steering knuckle assembly.
★ Don’t beat on end of the threaded tie rod end.
2. Remove tie rod end (4) by loosing nut (5) with a suitable wrench,
then check its condition.
3. Remove bolts (6) from the end cap, then slide the cylinder (7) out
of its housing. If necessary, use a rubber hammer.
★ Remove only parts that need to be overhauled and/or replaced.
4. Remove cylinder end cap (B) from cylinder barrel (10). Remove
the cylinder end cap and rod (9) from the cylinder barrel.
5. Remove all seals and o-rings (11), both from the cylinder end cap
and rod.
ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble new seal rings (1) onto the end cap (2), piston (3), and
cylinder body (4).
30-62 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

2. Slide pre assembled rod into cylinder (4).
3. Install tie rods (5) to ends of the cylinder and tighten with torque
wrench.
Guide rod: 300 Nm (221 lbf ft)
4. Instal steering cylinder into the axel, with tie rods (5), already
assembled on the ends.
5. Install the spacer flange.
6. Assemble and tighten the steering cylinder fastening bolts (6) with
torque wrench.
Guide rod: 120 Nm (89 lbf ft)
7. Align the tie rod ends (5) so they can be inserted into the steering
knuckle.
★ It is important to unscrew locking nut (7) to perform this oper-
ation
8. Insert tie rod end (8) into the steering knuckle, on the axel housing.
Assemble and tighten lock nut (9) with torque wrench.
Lock nut (9): 220 Nm (162 lbf ft)
9. Tighten lock nut (7) of tie rod (5) only when the toe-in adjustment
has been carried out.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-63 2

TOE ADJUSTMENT
1. Place two equal one meter long linear bars "A" on the wheel sides
and lock them with two lug nuts on the wheel hub studs.
★ The two bars should be centered in the middle so they are per-
pendicular to the supporting surface and parallel to the pinion
shaft axis. Align the two bars.
2. Measure the distance in mm "M" between the bar ends with a tape
measure.
3. Check that the difference in measurements between the wheel hub

diameter ends. The nominal toe-in (A) value is referred to the
external diameter of the wheel hub flange, therefore the measured
toe-in value (M) at the bar end must be related to the ratio between
length of bar and flange diameter.
Nominal toe-in = A ±2 mm (0.1 in) Measured toe-in = M ±5 mm

(1.0 in)
30-64 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

4. If toe-in is incorrect, adjust with two wrenches one tightening and
one loosening tie rods equally till the toe-in is within the required
tolerance.
A. After adjusting, tighten the lock nuts on the tie rod ends.
Lock nut: 250 Nm (184 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-65 2

STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Use the same bars "A" assembled for the toe-in adjustment and a
long bar perfectly set over the machined part of the axle (pinion
side), so the two bars form an acute angle at the maximum steering.
2. Adjust the alignment tool to 50° and position it on the long bar.
Using the alignment tool adjust the tie rod ends until both wheels
match at a 50° angle.
3. Adjust the steering stop retainer, tighten or loosen special stops (1)
on the steering knuckle, locking them in place with locknut (2).
Lock nut: 150 Nm (110 lbf ft)
★ Steer completely towards other side and repeat the same oper-
ations.
30-66 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

WHEEL HUB
OUTER PLANETARY DISASSEMBLY
★ Before draining the oil, position wheel hub (1) with plug (2) in the
upper position and loosen it in order to eliminate any possible inner
pressure, then remove it completely. Turn the wheel hub upside
down till the hole is in the lowest point. Drain the oil completely.
1. Remove fastens (3) and two stud bolts (4) from the planetary car-
rier with a standard wrench.
★ Do not ruin threads of the two stud bolts.
2. Remove planetary carrier from the wheel hub. Position the plane-
tary carrier on a workbench and check its wear conditions.
PLANETARY GEARS REPLACEMENT (IF NECES-

SARY)
1. Remove snap ring (5).
2. Remove thrust washer (6).
3. Remove planetary gears (7) from pins (8).
4. Collect needle bearings (9), checking their condition.
5. Remove thrust washers (10).

★ With new planetary gears, it is advisable to assemble new
roller bearings.
OUTER PLANETARY ASSEMBLY
1. Position the planetary carrier on a workbench.
2. Insert planetary gear (1), rollers (2), upper thrust washers (3), snap
rings (4), and plate (5) onto the planetary carrier pins.
3. Assemble the planetary reduction gear on the wheel hub. Apply

Loctite 542 on the hub side thread of two special stud bolts (7).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-67 2

4. Fasten bolts (6) and the two studs (7) and tighten with a torque
wrench.
Bolts (6): 80 Nm (59 lbf ft)

Studs (7): 70 Nm (52 lbf ft)
INNER WHEEL HUB

DISASSEMBLY
★ Before disassembling the wheel hub, it is advisable to secure it
with a hoist or any other supporting device, in order to avoid any
accidental falls that could damage either the operator or wheel hub
group.
1. Remove steel snap ring (1) from axle shaft (2) by using a suitable
snap ring pliers.
2. Remove and collect the lock ring, sleeve (3), and spacer (4) from
the axle shaft.
3. Remove fastening screws (5) from wheel carrier (6) group.
4. In order to remove wheel carrier group (6) from its housing, install
at least two fastening screws (5) into the threaded extraction holes
"A".
30-68 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

5. Extract and remove wheel carrier (6) together with planetary ring
gear (8).
6. Remove steel lock ring (7) and wheel carrier (6) from planetary
ring gear (8).
★ Check wear conditions of the components.
7. Only if necessary, remove centering bushings (9) of the hub lock

ring gear with a hammer and special tool Dl.
8. Remove hub (10), using levers and a hammer to facilitate the oper-
ation.
★ Collect bearing cone (11).
9. Position the hub on a flat surface and take seal (12) out.
★ Discard the seal.
10. Take bearing cups (11) and (13) out, on both sides of the hub, using
a hammer and a suitable tool.
11. Remove bearing cone (13) from the steering knuckle housing end,
using a suitable extractor.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-69 2

ASSEMBLY
1. Position wheel hub (11) on a workbench and install both bearing

cups (12) and (13) in position with special tool D20 using a press
or hammer.
2. Insert seal (14) into wheel hub (11) with special tool D21 and a
hammer.
3. Assemble the bearing cone (13) on housing end (7).
4. Assemble wheel hub (11) on steering knuckle (7) and install the
other bearing cone (12) into position.
5. Position wheel carrier (15) on a workbench and install bushing (16)

to the carrier surface with special tool D1.
★ At least two bushings (diametrically opposed) should be set
slightly higher than the carrier surface level to be used as
dowel pins.
6. Preassemble the wheel carrier group (17) and (18) with special
lock ring (19) as shown.
30-70 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

7. Assemble wheel carrier group (20) onto the wheel hub using the
two projecting bushings (16) as guide pins, use two mounting bolts
(21) to hold the gear in contact with the wheel hub.
8. Drive the dowel bushings (16) completely flush with the carrier
surface using special tool D1 and a hammer. Assemble wheel car-
rier (20) with bolts (21) and tighten.
Bolt (21): 230 Nm (170 lbf ft)
9. In the case bearings (22) and (23) are substituted, verify that mea-
surements "A", "B", and "C" are within limits.
A = 17.950 - 18.000 mm (1.0 in)

B = 64.275 - 64.325 mm (3.3 in)
C = 23.070 - 23.172 mm (1.0 in)
10. Slide spacer (24) onto the axle shaft, install sleeve (25) and assem-
bly lock ring (26) by inserting it at the end of the splined hub and
pushing it into its housing.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-71 2

STEERING KNUCKLE AND AXLE SHAFT

REMOVAL
1. Remove fasteners (14) from upper (15) and lower (16) king pin.
★ Before removing the king pins, secure the steering knuckle
with a hoist or any other supporting device.
2. Remove king pins (15) and (16).
3. Remove steering knuckle (17) from the axle beam and short shaft
(18) of the U-Joint.
4. Position swivel housing (17) on a flat surface and take seal (19) out
with a lever.
5. Invert steering knuckle (17) and take bushing (20) out, using a
hammer and driver.
30-72 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

ASSEMBLY
1. Install bushing (1) into steering nickel (2) with special tool D17
and a hammer or press.
2. Install seal (3) into housing (2) with special tool D18 and a ham-
mer.
★ Fill 3/4 of the cavity with grease.
3. Position lower king pin (4) on a workbench and assemble the cone
(5) with special tool D19. Shim under the bevelled washer on the
upper part. Generously grease the king pin housing with specified
grease.
4. Position bevelled washers (6) on the king pin housing.
5. Secure steering knuckle (7) with a rope. Lubricate seal lip and pro-
tect splined end of the axle shaft by wrapping it with thin adhesive
tape to avoid damage to the seal. After assembly, remove the adhe-
sive tape. Assemble steering knuckle on to the axle.
6. Assemble the two king pins, upper (9) and lower (8), then tighten
retaining bolts (10).
Bolt (10): 190 Nm (140 lbf ft)
★ Make sure that the beveled washers remain in their position.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-73 2

AXLE HOUSING ENDS

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove U-Joint (1) from the axle housing.
2. Take seal (2) out of the axle housing with a pry bar.
3. Remove cup springs (4) and (8) from the king pin housing in the
axle housing end.
4. Remove shim (9) from the upper part of axle housing.
5. Remove bushing (3) from the beam with a suitable extractor.

★ Examine the bushing before removal and replace it only if
wear conditions require replacement.
6. Take upper (5) and lower (6) bushings out of king pin housing (7)
with a suitable puller.
7. Remove seal (10) from the pivot with a suitable tool.

★ If necessary, replace the bushing with a standard three point
extractor, or a suitable driver and hammer.
30-74 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

ASSEMBLY
1. Install two new bushings (1) (assemble the longer bushing from
pinion side) and two new seal rings (2) into the unit by using spe-
cial tools "D12" and "D13".
2. Assemble upper king pin bushings (3) and (4) on the axle flange
with special tool "D14" and a hammer.
★ To make the assembly easier, it is suggest to cool the ball bear-
ing cup at a temperature less than -100° C (-148° F).
3. install bushing (5) into the axle housing with special tool D15 and a
hammer.
4. Install seal (6) in the steering knuckle with special tool D16 and a
hammer.
★ Fill 3/4 of the cavity with grease.
5. Lubricate bushing (5) and seal lip (6). Insert CV-Joint (7) inside
the axle housing.
★ Be careful not to damage the seal.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-75 2

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER (CARRIER SET UP)
REMOVAL
1. Remove fasteners (l) and nut (2) from flange (3). Using a small
chisel, detach the oil seal cover just enough to fit a lever.
2. Remove oil seal cover from the central beam assembly, using two
levers.
3. Remove seal (4) from the oil seal cover, using a suitable tool.
4. Replace O-ring (5).
5. Remove the bolts on differential support (6).

★ Support the differential carrier with an appropriate means.
★ Remove differential carrier (6).
30-76 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION
1. Install seal (8) in pinion cover (9) with special tool "D11".
2. Install new o-ring (10) onto pinion cover (9).
3. Install pinon cover (9) with a soft hammer.

★ Do not damage o-ring (10).
4. Before mating the two surfaces make sure they are perfectly clean.
Spread a film of Loctite 510 on the contact surface between the
axle housing and differential carrier. Position differential carrier
(11) on the axle housing. Install and tighten the bolts (12) to the
prescribed torque.
Bolt (12): 169 Nm (125 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-77 2

5. Install flange (13) onto the pinion end. Install flange bolts (14) with
nuts on flange (13). Tighten bolts and nuts with torque wrench to
the required torque.
RING AND PINION

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove two lock bolts (7) to remove two lock retainers (8).
2. Before removing bolts, mark bearing caps (9) and the differential
carrier with permanent reference marks to avoid inverting them
when reassembling the unit. Mark the area between adjustment
nuts and the differential carrier as well.
3. Remove adjuster ring nuts (10) using tool D2 and a wrench.
30-78 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

4. Remove four bolts (11) and two bearing caps (9).
A. Take out differential carrier (12).

★ Take care not to loose bearing cups (13) that are removed
keep them with the same bearing (12).
★ Do not mismatch bearing cups (13), if they are not to be
replaced.
★ Check that threads (14) in their housing.
PINION DISASSEMBLY
1. Fit differential carrier (1) in a vise.
2. Unscrew the lock nut using special tools D3 and D4.
3. Remove lock ring (2) and retaining washer (3).

★ Discard the lock nut and lock washer.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-79 2

4. Tap the shaft with a soft hammer to remove pinion gear (4).
★ Take care not to drop the pinion.
5. Collect two washers (5), crush sleeve (6), and the bearing cone (7).
★ Discard the crush sleeve
6. Place the carrier housing on a flat surface as shown, and remove

the outer bearing cups (7) using a driver and hammer.
7. To remove the inner cone of tapered roller bearing (13) from the
pinion (8), using a standard puller and tapered jaw (12).
8. Collect the bearing cone and the underlying shim.
9. Check all pinion components for wear.

★ Replace the listed parts shown in illustration.
30-80 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

RING GEAR DISASSEMBLY
1. Mount ring gear carrier (1) it in a vise.
2. Remove all fasteners (2) from ring gear (3).

★ This will make both differential half boxes free, so be careful
not to drop the internal components.
3. Remove the ring gear.
4. Split the planetary carrier into two halves complete with the com-
ponents.
5. Keep all components in proper order.
6. Check operating and wear conditions of the components.
7. Remove bearing (5) from carrier half (4), using two levers or a
three hold puller.
ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble the new tapered roller bearings (l) on half cases (2),
using special tool "D10" and a hammer.
2. After cleaning and checking both the operation and conditions of

the planetary gear set, assemble them back into there original order.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-81 2

3. Position carrier housing on a workbench and assemble all its inner
components (side gears, spider gears, thrust washers, pin, and dif-
ferential lock counter discs) as illustrated. Join two halves (2).
4. Position ring gear (3) and then tighten bolts (4).
Bolt (4): 95 Nm (70 lbf ft)
Bolt (4): Loctite 270
PINION SET UP
WARNING! Komatsu recommends that all o-rings and seals be replaced with new before assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Place differential housing (3) on a workbench.
2. Install the outer bearing cups (1) and (2), using special tool D5 and
a hammer.
Remark
Be sure to install the tapered ends facing away from the
housing.
3. In order to measure the pinion depth, use kit consisting of special

tools called "false pinion" D6 and false ring gear" D7 and D8.
4. Insert the false pinion with D6, together with its bearings and nut
(4), in the housings. Tighten until all the backlash is eliminated.
30-82 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

5. Install special tools D7 and D8 to the bearing cap supports and
screw in the cap bolts (5) and (6).
6. Use a deep gauge to take measurement "X".

★ Record your measurement "X".
7. Locate value "V" marked on head of the pinion gear. Calculate

shim thickness "S" to be installed beneath the pinion, using for-
mula: S = X-V "S" is thickness of the shims.
8. Install shim (8) onto pinion (7) and press inner bearing (1) using
tool D9.
★ Chamfer on inner diameter of shim must face the gear teeth.
9. Install washer (9), new crush sleeve (10), and then the second
washer (9).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-83 2

10. Insert pinion unit (7) into differential support housing (3) (from the
internal axle side), and second bearing cone (2) on to the pinion
end, from the opposite side.
★ In order to force the second bearing into position, use special
tool D9 and a hammer.
11. Insert new lock washer (11) and new lock nut (4) on the pinion end.
12. Tighten the nut, using wrench "D3" and for pinion retainer "D4".
★ Torque setting is given by the pre loading measurement on
bearings. Tighten the nut gradually.
★ If torque is excessive, the spacer must be replaced and the pro-
cedure repeated. When you check the preload, it is advisable to
tap slightly both pinion end with a soft hammer, to help set the
bearings.
13. Wind a wire line round the pinion, uniformly and without overlap-
ping. Connect it to a load meter and check rotational force "P"
force required to rotate the shaft.
★ Force should be that needed for continual rotation.
★ Do not take into consideration the initial starting force.
14. Using the tools mentioned in step "13", tighten lock nut (4) taking
rotational torque measurements at intervals until the indicated
force "P" has been obtained.
P = 9.2 to 13.7 Nm (7 to 10 lbf ft)
If maximum permissible value is exceeded, a new spacer must be
installed, and all the bearing pre-loading operations must be
repeated.
30-84 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
CHECKING GEAR BACK LASH AND
INSTALLING CARRIER
CHECKING BACK LASH
1. Position complete differential carrier (1), with outer bearing cups

(2), on to the differential carrier housing.
★ Take care not to invert the outer races of tapered roller bear-
ings and check the right side of the bevel crown assembly.
2. Place the differential bearing caps (3) and bolts in their correct
location. Check the reference marks. Tighten bolts (4) slightly.
3. Assemble the two adjustment ring (5) into the differential support
with tool "D2". Preload the differential bearings slightly. Tap
lightly with a soft hammer to properly set the bearings in position.
★ Take care not to reverse the nuts; align the previously traced
reference marks.
4. Position a magnetic base dial gauge "A" on the differential carrier,

so that the feeler arm touches the surface of one tooth on the crown
of the gear with a 90 angle. Lock the pinion and move the ring gear
note the pinion ring gear backlash, measurement. Repeat the opera-
tion on 2 or more points, rotating the ring gear, to obtain an average
backlash value.
★ Permissible backlash: 0.18 - 0.25 mm (0.007 - 0.010 in)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-85 2

5. If the measured backlash is lesser than the given tolerance range,
screw the ring nut from the side opposite to the ring gear and
unscrew the opposite one the same distance. If the measured back-
lash is higher than the given tolerance range, screw the ring nut
from the side of the ring gear and unscrew the opposite one the
same distance.
★ Before measuring the clearance, knock lightly on bearing cov-
ers with a mallet to ensure they are securely positioned.
6. Tighten bolts (4).
7. Using the same method employed to check the pinion rotation

torque, check force "T" required to rotate the entire group.
★ Force required: (P+3.9) < T < (P+5.9) Nm (P+35) and
(P+310) in/lbs P = force found for the pinion only.
★ The force should be a continual rotation. Do not take the thrust
force into consideration.
8. If the force is not within permissible limits:
A. Tighten both lock nuts the same to increase force "T".
B. Loosen both lock nuts the same to decrease force "T".

★ The clearance between the ring gear and pinion must
remain within these limits.
9. Check the contact area using the following procedure:
A. Coat both surfaces of the teeth and ring gear with a layout blu-
ing.
B. Rotate the pinion.
30-86 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

If contact area is near the top edge of the teeth, the ring gear must
be brought closer to the pinion. If the contact area is near the bot-
tom edge of the teeth, the ring bevel must be moved away from the
pinion.
10. Torque bolts (4) after ring and pinion set-up is complete.
Bolt (4): 266 Nm (196 lbf ft)
11. Once adjustments have been completed, install the adjuster locks
(6) and bolts (7).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-87 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY REAR AXLE
REAR AXLE
REMOVAL
1. Lower outriggers (l) in order to raise the rear wheels (2) approxi-
mately 5 cm (2 in).
2. Position a safety stand "A", approximately 65 cm (26 in) high,

beneath the backhoe chassis. Retract the outriggers until the
machine is resting on stand "A".
3. Stop the engine and remove the rear wheels (2).
Wheel: 163 kg (359 lb)
4. For safety, rest the backhoe bucket with back resting on the ground,
keeping the arm vertical. Also lower front bucket on the ground.
5. Stop engine and completely release any residual pressures from all
the circuits. (For-details, see section "2O TESTING AND
ADJUSTMENTS").
6. Disconnect parking brake cable (4) and differential lock tube (5)
from rear axle (3).
★ Plug all openings to prevent entry of impurities.
7. Disconnect rear drive shaft (6) from the rear axle.
8. Disconnect brake hoses (7) and remove bolts (8).
30-88 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

9. Partially loosen eight lock nuts (9) in order to eliminate the torque
and facilitate subsequent dismantling.
★ Loosen lock nuts (9) in a crisscross sequence.
10. Place jacks "B" and some blocks beneath axle (3). Raise the jack
until the blocks can be positioned under the axle.
★ Loosen nuts (9) and plates (10) that secure the axle.
★ It should be possible to lower the jack by approximately 20 cm
(8 in).
11. Remove lock nuts (9), plates (10), and mounting bolts (11).
12. Lower the jack until axle (3) is disengaged from the chassis.
13. Extract entire axle (3).
INSTALLATION
Wheel nuts: 500 ± 9.8 Nm (369 ± 7 lbf ft)
★ Adjust stroke of the parking brake lever. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ Bleed air from the brake circuits. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
Lock nuts (9) for securing axle: 570 Nm (420 lbf ft)
★ Tighten in two stages, using the crisscross method.
• Check oil level in tank and start the engine.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-89 2

OUTER PLANETARY REDUCTION GEAR
DISASSEMBLY
★ Before draining the oil, position the hub with plug in the upper
position and loosen it in order to eliminate any possible inner pres-
sure, then remove the plug completely.
★ Turn the hub upside down till the hole at the lowest point.
★ Drain the oil completely.
1. Remove two bolts (1) on planetary carrier (2).
2. Remove planetary carrier (2) from wheel hub (3). Place the plane-
tary carrier on a table and check its wear conditions.
3. Remove o-ring (4).
4. To replace planetary gears (5), remove bolt (6) and washers (7) and
(8).
★ Treat pin (9) with care.
5. Remove planetary gear (5) from its seat, taking care not to lose
rollers (10) thrust washer (11) and (12).
★ If pins (13) on the pinion gears are in poor condition, replace
the entire planetary train.
★ If half shaft stop (14) is worn, replace the entire planetary car-
rier.
30-90 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
ASSEMBLY
1. Place the planetary carrier on a work bench and install planetary

gears (1) and washers (2) on the dowels already in place.
2. Insert all the rollers (3) into planetary gears (4), then add two thrust
washers (5) and (6).
★ The first thrust washer must be aligned with the dowel pin.
3. Attach planetary gears (4) with bolts (7) and tighten with a torque
wrench.
4. Insert o-ring on the centering diameter of the wheel hub.
5. Install the planetary carrier on to wheel hub (8). Using a torque

wrench, insert and tighten bolts (9).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-91 2

12
INNER WHEEL HUB
DISASSEMBLY
★ Before disassembling the wheel hub, it is advisable to secure it
with a belt or a rope on a hoist or any other supporting device, in
order to avoid an accidental fall that could damage either the tech-
nician or wheel hub group.
1. Remove the short shaft. Remove bolts (1) from the wheel and hub
lock ring (2).
2. To remove hub lock ring (2) from its housing, install two of the
bolts (1) in the threaded extraction holes "A".
3. Remove hub lock ring gear (2), together with the planetary ring
gear (3).
4. Remove steel ring (4) and hub (2) from planetary set (3).
5. Only if necessary, remove centering bushings (5) from the hub lock
ring gear with a hammer and special tool El.
30-92 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

6. Remove hub (6), using levers and a hammer.
★ Collect bearing (7).
7. Place the hub on a flat surface, and remove seal (8) with a lever.
★ Discard seal (8).
8. Remove bearing cups (9) and (10), on both sides of the hub, using a
hammer and a suitable tool. Remove bearing cone (10) from the
housing end, using a suitable extractor.
.
ASSEMBLY
1. Place wheel hub (1) on a work bench and install the two cups of
taper roller bearings (2) and (3) in position using special tool E17
under a press or with a hammer.
2. Using special tool E18 and a hammer insert seal (4) into the wheel
hub.
3. Assemble the cone of taper roller bearing (3) onto the end of axle
housing (5).
4. Assemble wheel hub (1) onto the end of axle housing (5), then
install the cone of taper roller bearing (2) into position.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-93 2

5. Position wheel carrier (6) on a work bench, and using special tool
E1 install bushings (7) to the carrier surface level.
★ At least two bushings (diametrically opposed) should be set
slightly higher than the carrier surface level to be used as
dowel pins.
6. Preassemble wheel carrier group (8), planetary ring gear (9), with
special snap ring (10) as shown.
7. Assembly wheel carrier group (8) onto wheel hub (1) using the two
projecting bushings (7) as dowel pins.
8. Insert wheel carrier bolts (11), with special tool E1 and a hammer
force the two projecting bushings (7) to the carrier surface level.
Then using a torque wrench tighten bolts (11).
Bolts (11): 230 Nm (170 lbf ft)
30-94 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

9. In case bearings (2) and (3) have been substituted, verify that mea-
surements "A", "B", and "C" are within the proper limits. A =
17.950 - 18.000 mm (0.707 - 0.709 in) B = 64.275 - 64.325 mm
(2.531 - 2.533 in) C = 23.070 - 23.172 mm (0.908 - 0.912 in)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-95 2

12
AXLE HOUSING AND BRAKES
DISASSEMBLY
★ Drain oil from the axle, removing the breathers first, to release any
axle inner pressure, then loosen the plug very carefully.
1. Remove seal (1) from the axle housing with a lever.

★ Discard the seal (1).
2. In order to replace the axle housing, bushing (2) must be cut with a
chisel.
★ Do not ruin the bushing seat
3. Place alignment marks on the axle housing and on the differential

supporting flanges, in order to identify the right and left sides.
4. Position the axle on supports, designed to hold either the housing

or two beam ends.
5. Remove bolts (3) and disassemble the axle housing end.
6. Remove the axle housing end.

★ Once the axle end has been removed, the brake disks are free.
7. Remove o-ring (4) from oil passage and check its condition.
Remove the long axle shaft (5) and sleeve. Remove the snap ring
from the sleeve.
30-96 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

8. Remove the first brake disc (6).
9. Remove plates (7) and counter disk (8) being careful as to how the
different parts are positioned.
10. Remove brake splined sleeve (9), locating the indent position.
★ The brake splined sleeve should be reassembled in the same
position and order as before disassembling.
11. Remove the last disk (10).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-97 2

12. Place the brake flange on a hoist. Remove lower bolt (11). Remove
differential supporting flange (12) from the central housing,
together with the bevel gear backlash adjusting ring nut and brake
control.
★ This operation frees the housing, so be careful it does not fall.
13. Remove o-ring (13) from its housing and discard it.
14. Remove o-ring (14) from the two oil supply holes and discard
them.
15. Remove oil vent tube (15) from the housing.
16. Remove o-rings (16) and discard them.
30-98 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

BRAKE CONTROL
DISASSEMBLY
1. Position the assembly on a workbench or fix it in a clamp.
2. Loosen locknut (1) and remove the adjusting screw on the support
bracket (2). Remove the adjusting screw.
3. Remove lever bolt (3) and shaft end (4).
4. Remove washer (5).
5. Place alignment marks on lever (4) and shaft (6) for use during re-
installation.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-99 2

6. Loosen lever (4) to release the tension on spring (7).
7. Remove lever (4).
8. Remove spring 7.
9. Remove washer (8) and spacer (9).
10. Remove two bolts (10) that mount bracket (2).
30-100 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

11. Remove bracket (2).
12. Place alignment mark on cam (11) near the set screw (12), align
with top of the roll pin, for use during assembly.
13. .Remove set screw (12) to free the cam.
14. Remove the shaft set screw (13), be careful not to lose ball (14).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-101 2

15. With a magnet, collect steel ball (14).
16. Remove o-ring (15), then remove shaft (16).
17. Remove shaft (16), then remove cam (11).
18. Remove the brake mechanism upper bolts (17), then remove
springs (18) and bushings (19)
30-102 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

19. Remove the lower self adjustment mounting bolts (20), bushings
(21), and spacers (22).
20. Remove brake flange (24) and bleeder vent (23).
21. Remove piston (25).

★ If necessary, using minimum air pressure, blow air through the
bleeder vent to eject piston (25). Be careful.
22. Remove and discard o-rings (26) and (27) from piston (25).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-103 2

23. Remove bolt (28) on ring nut retainer (29).
24. Remove ring nut retainer (30).
25. Using special tool E2, remove ring nut (32).
26. Removing bearing cup (31) with a hammer and suitable tool.
30-104 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

ASSEMBLY
1. Using the reference marks placed during disassembly, insert cam

(2) and shaft (3) into brake flange (1).
2. When the shaft is inserted into the cam, align the reference marks
with cam setscrew (4) hole.
3. Insert cam setscrew (4).
4. Tighten setscrew (4) with a torque wrench.
Setscrew (4): 10 Nm (7 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-105 2

5. Insert steel ball (5) that sets shaft (3) and shaft setscrew (6).
6. Tighten setscrew (6) with a torque wrench.
Setscrew (6): 25 Nm (18 lbf ft)
7. Place o-ring (7) onto shaft (3).
8. Position supporting bracket (8), and fasten with bolts (9).
30-106 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

9. With a torque wrench tighten bolts (9).
10. Insert spacer (11), washer (10), and spring (12) on the shaft end.
11. Using the reference marks placed during disassembly, insert brake
control lever (13).
BRAKE AND AXLE HOUSING

ASSEMBLY
1. Insert the first odd shaped brake plate (1), in the indicated position
compared to the cam position.
2. Check to be sure that the friction discs and plates do not show any
sign of burning, if so, replace them. Also check friction disc wear,
and replace if required.
★ Friction disc thickness: minimum 4.03 mm (0.159 in)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-107 2

3. Using the figure to the right, assemble friction discs (2), and plates
(4), coupling (3) inside the flange.
★ Coupling (3) should be inserted after the first disc (1) is posi-
tioned with the shortest spline against the differential.
★ Before assembling, new brake discs should be dipped in a suit-
able oil.
★ Be sure the disc and disc plates move freely.
4. Insert long half shaft (5) into axle housing (6). Position lock ring
(7) on the inner seat of sleeve (8). Then insert sleeve (8) onto long
half shaft (5).
★ Sleeve (8) must be inserted with the inner lock ring (7) resting
against long half shaft (5).
5. Before assembling the axle ends, check the reference marks made
at disassembly.
6. Using special tool E15, drive bushing (9) into the seat on the axle
end housing.
30-108 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

7. Lubricate o-rings and assemble them into the axle housing end and
the two oil vent holes. Assemble the axle end onto the flange, be
sure to properly align the fastening holes.
★ Use a supports and lifting devise with ropes or belts.
8. Connect axle end housing to the flange with bolts (10) and tighten
with a torque wrench.
Bolts (10): 176 Nm (130 lbf ft)
★ Assemble the breather adapter with notch aligned to the half

shaft.
9. Lubricate the lip of seal (11), and using special tool E16 insert into
the seat of axle housing.
10. Insert short half shaft (12) into the axle assembly.
11. To set the brake, put the system under pressure. Use compressed air
at high pressure blown through the breather.
★ The brake system (piston, discs, self adjustment kit, and brake
mechanism return kit) should be set before moving the brake
control levers.
12. Operate the control levers, setting them on braking position

(locked levers).
★ The lever return springs should not be connected.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-109 2

13. Measure the distance between the middle of the connection holes at
ends of the control levers. The range should be 301 - 310.5 mm
(11.85 - 12.22 in)
• If the value is not within the specified range, remove the con-
trol levers from the shaft and reinsert them shifted one spline.
Remeasure the distance and repeat until the proper range is
achieved.
14. Release the brake control levers, insert bolt (13) and washers (14).
Tighten with a torque wrench.
Bolt (13): 35 Nm (26 lbf ft)
15. Install return spring (15) to brake control lever (16).
16. Check to be sure that in the rest position, the measurement between
the middle of connection holes at the lever ends is higher than the
minimum value of 320 mm (12.598 in).
30-110 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

17. Assemble adjusting bolts (17) on the brackets until they are in con-
tact with the levers
18. Tighten adjusting bolts (17) the same distance to reach the range
for the levers in rest position. 320 - 329.5 mm (12.598 - 12.972 in)
19. If adjusting bolt (17) is not perpendicular to the side surface of

lever (16), adjust its position by moving the supporting
bracket.FRONT BOOM LIFT CYLINDER
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-111 2

12
RING GEAR AND CARRIER
DISASSEMBLY
1. Place the differential in a vise, remove all the bolts (1) from ring
gear (2).
★ This will free both carrier housing halves, be careful not to
drop the internal components.
2. Separate the carrier case halves (3) complete with the components.
★ Mark the two case halves before separation, in order to reas-
semble them in the same position as before separation.
3. Disassemble all the components and check operation and wear

condition.
★ Remove bearings (4) from the carrier halves, using two levers
or a three hold extractor.
PINION DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove snap ring (1) and slide flange (2) off, then remove o-ring
(3) and shim (4).
2. Remove seal (5) from the housing with a puller.

3. Position the housing on a steady surface before disassembly
30-112 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

4. Using special tools E3 and E4, remove pinion nut (6).
5. Remove tabbed washer (7), then remove pinion (8) out of its hous-
ing by tapping with a hammer (with a soft material head) on the
splined end.
6. Remove washers (9), crush sleeve (10), and tapered roller bearing
cones (11).
★ Always replace crush sleeve (10) with new when reassem-
bling.
7. Remove bearing cone (12) from the end of the pinion (8) using a
suitable extractor.
8. Remove adjusting shim (13) placed under the bearing, and check
its wear condition.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-113 2

9. In order to remove the differential lock shaft, remove cylinder sup-
port screw (14), then remove o-rings and piston (15). Remove
seeder ring (16) bushing (17) that is pushed outside by spring (19),
then remove bushing and spring from shaft (18). Remove cover
(20), paying attention to spring (21) that could still be under load.
Remove shaft (18) by removing the o-ring, spring, spacer, and snap
ring.
10. Extract differential lock fork (22) from the central housing.
★ Check the integrity of all components disassembled.
11. Take the roller bearing cups out of the housing (23), using a ham-
mer and drift pin.
30-114 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

PINION ASSEMBLY
WARNING! Komatsu recommends that all o-rings and seals be replaced with new before assembly.
1. Position housing (1) on a work bench.
2. Using the special tools included in kit E5, insert the tapered roller
bearing cups into their housings.
3. Measure the distance using the special tools in kits E5 and E6,
respectively called "false pinion" and "false differential case".
4. Insert the "false pinion" together with bearings (2) and (3) and nut
(4), in housing for the bearings. Tighten till the backlash is elimi-
nated.
5. Check for correct positioning of the right and left flanges, using the
reference marks on them and the housing. Assemble the two brake
flanges (5), and install them with bolts (6) M14 X 120.
★ Screw in at least two bolts (6) diametrically opposed for each

flange.
6. Insert the "false differential case" with E6 into the housing to mea-
sure the distance.
★ Check that the false case is inserted into both brake flange
housings (5).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-115 2

7. Using a depth gauge, measure "A" through the false pinion hole
and calculate measurement "X". B = 100 mm (3.937 in) C = 50
mm (1.969 in)
(A + C) - B = X
8. Make a note of value "V" marked on head of the pinion. Calculate

measurement "S", the thickness of shim to be installed beneath the
pinion.
X-V=S
9. Remove the false pinion, bearings (2) and (3), and nut (4) from the
housing (1). Disassemble the false differential case from flanges
(5), then remove the bolts and flanges.
10. Install shim (8) onto pinion (7), and press the inner bearing (2),
using special tool E8.
★ Always use new crush sleeve.
11. Insert pinion (7) into the housing (1) and second bearing cone (3)
into the pinion end.
★ Use special tool E8 and a hammer to install bearing into posi-
tion.
30-116 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12. Insert a new nut washer (9) and nut retainer (4) into pinion shaft
(7).
13. Install the nut, using special tools wrench E3 and pinion retainer
E4.
★ Torque setting is given by the pre load measurement on the
bearings.
★ Tighten the nut step by step.
★ If it is tightened too much, replace the crush sleeve with new
and repeat the procedure.
14. Carry out the pre load measurement "P" of the pinion roller bear-
ings, using a dynamometer with the cord wound on the 34.87 mm
(1.373 in) diameter of the pinion spline.
★ This adjustment is carried out by increasing the torque setting
gradually, being careful not to exceed it.
★ All pre loads should be measured without the seal.
15. Once the preload value is obtained, lock the nut using a hammer
and punch.
P = 9.2 - 13.8 Nm (81 - 122 in/lbs)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-117 2

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble the bearing cones (1) on the differential carrier halves

(2), using special tool E9 and a hammer.
2. Position a carrier half (2) on a workbench and assemble all the

inner components (spider gears, axle gears, thrust washers, pins,
discs, and counter discs). Join the two carrier halves (2) together,
aligning the reference marks (made at disassembly).
3. Position ring gear (3), apply loctite 270 (on the bolt threads), then
tighten bolts (4).
30-118 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

RING AND PINION SET UP

ASSEMBLY
1. Position the flange on a flat surface and using special tool E10,
interchangeable handle E11 and a hammer, install the cup of
tapered roller bearing (1) into position.
2. Locate brake piston (3). Push pin (2) into the self adjustment hous-
ing till they are level with the piston supporting inner surface.
Insert o-rings (4) and (5) on the piston. Lubricate the surface, pis-
ton flange with a light layer of grease.
3. Apply a light layer of grease on the piston surfaces, especially on

the o-rings already inserted. Insert piston (3) into brake flange (6).
Position special tool E12 or a disc on the piston, with a lever
anchored to a eyebolt, apply just enough pressure to force the pis-
ton into the brake flange.
4. Install the components of the self adjustment kit on piston (3) as

shown in the figure to the right, then tighten mounting screws (7).
Screw (7): 10 Nm (7 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-119 2

5. Lubricate new o-rings (8) (oil pipe hole) on the housing. Grease
two new o-rings (9) and insert them in oil pipe (10).
6. Insert the oil vent tube, then insert differential locking fork into the
housing.
★ Do not invert the locking fork assembly position.
7. Lubricate and insert new o-ring (11) on the flange, then assemble
the left flange to the housing.
8. Tighten the bolt on the brake cylinder with a torque wrench.
Securing bolt: 79 Nm (58 lbf ft)
★ Check and be sure the reference marks made at disassembly

between the flange and housing line up.
9. Before adjusting the ring gear bearings pre load, fasten the brake
cylinders with two bolts (M14 X 120).
Bolt (M14 X 120): 79 Nm (58 lbf ft)
Once the adjustments have been made, remove the M14 X 120
bolts.
★ Assemble the differential housing with its relative compo-
nents.
10. Position the flange housing on a flat surface, then insert the differ-
ential housing.
★ Assembly the differential locking device components as

shown to the right.
30-120 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

11. Once snap ring (13) has been installed into shaft (12), about 20 mm
(.75 in) from the flat end, install the shaft into its housing in the
gear side, slipping it into fork (14).
★ Do not force the snap ring in the housing.
12. Insert spring (20) and bushing (21) onto shaft (12), working in the
housing on the opposite side of the gear, assemble snap ring (22) in
its housing.
13. Insert piston (24) with o-rings (23) and (25) into cylinder (27).
Assemble o-ring (26) onto cylinder (27), then insert the support
into the housing fastening them with bolts (28) and tighten with a
torque wrench.
Bolts (28): 27.6 Nm (20 lbf ft)
★ Lubricate all the o-rings, piston, and inner surface of the cylin-
der with oil.
14. Push lock ring (13) onto the differential locking devise (12), by
working in the housing on the bevel gear side. Then let lock ring
(13) slide along shaft (12) with a suitable tool. Insert spacer (15)
and spring (16) onto the shaft. Lubricate o-ring (17) with oil and
assemble to cap (18). Assemble cap (18) to the housing at the flat-
tened end of the shaft with two bolts (19).
Bolts (19): 27.6 Nm (20 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-121 2

15. Assemble the right brake flange and tighten the bolts with a torque
wrench.
Securing screw: 79 Nm (58 lbf ft)
Once correctly assembled, assemble the second brake flange oppo-

site the bevel gear side. Insert and tighten the adjusting nuts of the
pinion gear, using a wrench and special tool E2 till the bearing
backlash is eliminated. Then measure the pinion ring gear back-
lash.
16. Assemble special tool E13 on the pinion end.

Move the pinion end alternately and note the pinion gear backlash,
measured with a dial gauge "A", so the feeler is in contact and at
90° with the bracket surface on special tool in correspondence with
the reference mark. Check if the measured backlash value is within
the required range.
★ Backlash: 0.1 - 0.23 mm (0.007 - 0.009 in)
Perform the adjustment on the two ring gear nuts with special tool
E2. Adjust the nuts remembering that:
• If the measured backlash is less than the given tolerance range,
tighten the nut from the side opposite to the ring gear and
loosen the opposite one the same distance.
• If the measured backlash is higher than the given tolerance
range, tighten the nut from the side of the ring gear and loosen
the opposite one the same distance.
17. Once the pinion ring gear backlash has been adjusted, also check
that there is a minimum pre load on the differential housing bear-
ings. Repeat the sequence till the correct backlash is reached.
18. Once the pinion gear backlash has been established, measure the
total pre load "T" of the bearings (pinion ring gear system), using
a dynamometer whose cord "B" is wound on diameter 34.87 mm
(1.373 in) of the pinion spline shaft.
★ Force required: (P+3.73) < T < (P+5.55) daN P = the force
found for the pinion
★ The force should be that of continual rotation. Do not take the
thrust force into consideration.
19. If the force is not within permissible limits:
A. Tighten both the lock nuts to the same extent to increase the
force "T".
B. Loosen both lock nuts to the same extent to decrease force "T".
30-122 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

WARNING! The clearance between the ring gear and

the pinion must remain within permissible
limits.
20. Check the centering of contact area using the following procedure:
A. Coat both surfaces of the ring gear with lay out bluing.
B. Rotate the pinion.

• If the contact area is excessive near edge of the teeth, the
ring gear must be brought close to the pinion.
• If the contact area is excessive on the side of the teeth, the
ring gear must be moved away from the pinion.
21. Insert retainer nut (29), turning the gear nut slightly to align it with
the retainer. Tighten bolt (30) of the nut with a torque wrench.
Bolt (30): 13 Nm (10 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-123 2

22. Using seal driver E14, insert seal into the housing.
23. Coat the seal lip and o-ring with, then insert them on the pinion
shaft together with shim, new o-ring, and install flange. Secure the
assembled parts with snap ring (4).
30-124 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-125 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT BUCKET BOOM CYLINDERS
12
FRONT BUCKET BOOM CYLINDERS
REMOVAL
WARNING! Stop the machine on level ground,
lower all work equipment to the ground,
and shut off the engine. Then apply the
parking brake and put blocks under the
wheels to prevent the machine from
moving.
1. Sling cylinder (1), insert blocks (A) between boom (2) and fulcrum
lever spacer (3).
2. Remove the snap ring and the internal spacer for piston attachment pin (4).
3. Remove pin (4) in order to free piston head (5), but leave fulcrum
lever (3) attached.
4. Start the engine to retract piston (1).

★ Bind the piston head with wire to secure the fully retracted
position and shut off the engine.
WARNING! Loosen the oil filler cap slowly to

release the pressure inside the hydrau-
lic tank. Then operate the control levers
several times to release the remaining
pressure in the hydraulic lines.
WARNING! Cut off electrical supply by turning the

battery disconnect switch counter clock-
wise and remove the handle.
5. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (6) and (7), then plug them to prevent
the entry of impurities.
6. Remove snap ring (8) and spacer (9).
7. Remove cylinder (1).
Cylinder (1): 40 kg (88 lbs)
30-126 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT BUCKET BOOM CYLINDERS
12
INSTALLATION
• Install the hoses without twisting or interference.
★ Start the engine and run at low idle, operate the control levers and extend the rod to align the pin holes.
WARNING! When aliening the position of the pin hole

use a bar. NEVER insert your fingers in
the pin hole.
Internal bushing: ASL800050
1. Start the engine and bleed air from the cylinders. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
★ After bleeding the cylinders, check the oil level
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-127 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT BUCKET TILT CYLINDER
FRONT BUCKET TILT CYLINDER
REMOVAL

moving.
1. Loosen clips (1) and remove the tube protection (2).

★ For right hand cylinder only Disconnect sensor (3) and
remove the bucket position indicator (4) (right hand cylinder
only).
2. Place a sling around cylinder (5) and insert block (A) between
spacer (6) of the ram fulcrum lever (7) and link (8).
3. Remove the snap ring and internal retaining spacer for cylinder
attachment pin (9).
4. Remove pin (9).
5. Start the engine to retract cylinder ram (10).

★ Bind the ram head with wire to secure it in the fully retracted
position and shut off the engine.

WARNING! Cut off electrical supply by turning the

battery disconnect switch counter clock-
wise and remove the handle.
30-128 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT BUCKET TILT CYLINDER
6. Remove bolt (11) and clamp (12)
7. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (13) and (14), then plug them to pre-
vent the entry of impurities.
8. Remove snap ring (15) and spacer (16).
INSTALLATION
★ Start the engine and run at low idle, operate the control levers and extend the ram to align the pin holes.
WARNING! When aliening the position of the pin hole

use a bar. NEVER insert your fingers in
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-129 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT BUCKET
FRONT BUCKET
REMOVAL
WARNING! Stop the machine on level ground, lower all work equipment to the ground, and shut off
the engine. Then apply the parking brake and put blocks under the wheels to prevent the
1. Remove bolts (1), pins (2), and disconnect lever (3)

★ Rest lever (3) on the boom.
2. Remove bolts (4) and pins (5) of the bucket attachment.
3. Start the engine, put the machine in reverse gear, and back up to
disengage boom (6).
30-130 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT BUCKET
INSTALLATION
WARNING! When aliening the position of the pin hole use a bar. NEVER insert your fingers in the
pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-131 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT
FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT
REMOVAL

moving.

1. Remove the bucket tilt cylinders.

• See “FRONT BUCKET TILT CYLINDER” on page 30-128.
2. Disconnect boom cylinders (2) from boom (1) and rest them on
wooden blocks (A) placed on the front axle.
3. Open front hood (3) and remove bolts (4) that lock the axle pivot
pins to the boom (1). Close the front hood.
30-132 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT WORKING EQUIPMENT
4. Sling boom (1) as shown, and attach to a hoist. Apply slight tension
to the sling.
5. Using a puller, remove the axle oscillation pins (5) of boom (1).
6. Start the engine, put the machine into reverse gear, back the
machine up, until the boom is disengaged and clears.
7. Place two stands in position and lower the boom.
960 kg (2,116 lbs)
INSTALLATION
★ Start the engine and run at low idle, operate the control levers and extend the cylinder ram to align the pin holes.
WARNING! When aliening the position of the pin hole use a bar. NEVER insert your fingers into
the pin hole.
• Start the engine and bleed air from the cylinders. For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-133 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Swing the backhoe completely to the right of the machine, rotate
the boom approximately 45° to the right.
2. Lower outriggers to the ground, open the bucket and rest the arm
on a block, keeping it perpendicular to the ground.
3. Rest the bucket on the ground, release the backhoe plate and shut
the engine off.

4. Remove lower window (1) from the cab, and completely raise the
upper window.
5. Remove grips (2) from control levers of the outriggers.
6. Raise control lever boots (3), remove bolts (4) and cover (5).
★ If any optional devises have been installed, unhook spool com-
mand tie rod (6), pedal (7), and support (8).
30-134 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
7. Disconnect the lever command tie rods (11) from control valve
(10).
8. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (12) (delivery, return, load sensing, and

actuator lines), then plug them to prevent entry of impurities.
★ Mark hydraulic hoses (12) before removing, in order to reas-
9. Sling control valve (10), and attach to a hoist. Apply slight tension
to the sling.
10. Remove four mounting bolts (13), then remove control valve (10).
Control valve: 6 spool 47 kg (104 lbs) 7 spool 53 kg

(117 lbs) 8 spool 59 kg (130 lbs)
INSTALLATION
★
• Start the engine and bleed air from the load sensing circuits and from hydraulic circuits of all the actuators. For details, see
section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-135 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BOOM CYLINDER
BACKHOE BOOM CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the lubrication grease fitting and the extension.
2. Extend arm (2) completely and fully open bucket (3).

★ Manoeuvre the front equipment until the bucket teeth are rest-
ing on the ground, the arm on block (A) about 10 cm (4 in)
high, and the joint between the arm and boom on a stand (B),
about 70 cm (28 in) high (as shown).

moving.
3. Sling boom cylinder (4), and attach to a hoist. Apply slight tension
to the sling.
4. Remove bolts (5) and pin (6).
5. Start the engine and retract piston (4).

★ Secure the cylinder ram with wire.

entry of impurities.
7. Remove bolt (9) and pin (10).
Cylinder (4): 73 kg (161 lbs) - WB140-2 78 kg (172

lbs) - WB150-2
INSTALLATION
30-136 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BOOM CYLINDER
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-137 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE ARM CYLINDER
BACKHOE ARM CYLINDER
REMOVAL
★ Lower arm (3) until the joint between the arm and boom is
resting on stand (A) about 90 cm (35 in) high, and the tip of
arm (1) is resting on block (B) about 10 cm (4 in) high (as
shown). Rest the bucket teeth on the ground.

moving.
2. Sling arm cylinder (4), and attach to a hoist. Apply slight tension to
the sling.
4. Start the engine and retract cylinder ram (7).

★ Secure the piston ram with wire.
WARNING! Stop the engine, loosen the oil filler cap

slowly to release the pressure inside
the hydraulic tank. Then operate the
control levers several times to release
the remaining pressure in the hydraulic
lines.
6. Remove snap ring (10) and pin (11).
30-138 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE ARM CYLINDER
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-139 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TELESCOPIC ARM CYLINDER
TELESCOPIC ARM CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Extend arm (1) completely.
★ Lower arm (1) until is resting on stand (A) about 40 cm. (16
in) high. Extend telescopic arm (2) until it is resting on block
(B), and rest the bucket teeth on the ground.
2. Stop the engine and release cylinder (3) pressure by moving the
command pedal several times.
the sling.
4. Remove snap ring and pin (4).
5. Start the engine and retract cylinder ram.


lines.
6. Remove safety pin (5).
7. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (6), (7), (8), and (9), then plug them to
prevent entry of impurities.
8. Remove clamp (10).
30-140 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TELESCOPIC ARM CYLINDER
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-141 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BUCKET CYLINDER
BACKHOE BUCKET CYLINDER
REMOVAL
★ Lower arm (3) until the joint between the arm and boom is
resting on stand (A) about 90 cm (35 in) high, and the tip of
arm (1) is resting on block (B) about 10 cm (4 in) high (as
shown). Rest the bucket teeth on the ground.

moving.
2. Stop the engine and release the pressure in cylinder (4) by moving
the control lever several times.
the sling.
4. Remove lock nut (5), washer, and pin (6).
5. Start the engine and retract cylinder ram (7).


lines.
30-142 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BUCKET CYLINDER
7. Remove snap ring (10) and pin (11).
★ For machines equipped with telescopic arm, loosen nut (12)

and remove pin (13).
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
★ Tighten locknut completely, then loosen it one half turn.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-143 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OUTRIGGER CYLINDERS
OUTRIGGER CYLINDERS
REMOVAL
WARNING! Rest the back of the bucket on the

ground, keeping the arm vertical.

moving.
1. Lower the outriggers to the ground and stop the engine.
2. Sling outrigger cylinder (1), and attach to a hoist. Apply slight ten-
sion to the sling.
★ Leave hoses and tubes free.
3. Remove nut (2) and bolt (3). Then draw out pin (4) until the ram
head is disengaged.
4. Start the engine and retract ram (5).

★ Secure the piston cylinder ram with wire.

lines.
6. Remove nut (8), bolt (9), and pin (10).
30-144 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OUTRIGGER CYLINDERS
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-145 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE SWING CYLINDERS
BACKHOE SWING CYLINDERS
REMOVAL
WARNING! Position the backhoe with the equipment centered, arm vertical, and back of the bucket
resting on the ground.
1. Stop the engine and release cylinder pressure by moving the con-
trol levers several times.
2. Remove retaining screws (1) out of clamp (2).
3. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (4) from cylinder (3), then plug them
to prevent entry of impurities.
4. Remove bolts (5), then vertically remove upper support (6) of the
cylinder mounting.
6. Rotate the cylinders to disengage ram ends from swing bracket (9),
then remove cylinders (3).
Cylinder (3): 32.5 kg (72 lbs)
30-146 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE SWING CYLINDERS
INSTALLATION
1. Mount cylinders (3) and upper support (6). Secure support (6) with
four bolts (5).
Support bolts (5): Loctite 262
Support bolts (5): 100 ±10 Nm (74 ±7 lbf ft)
2. Connect four hydraulic hoses (4) to cylinders (3).
3. Start the engine and swing the boom in order to center one of two pins (8). Secure the 1st pin with bolt (7). Repeat this
step for the other pin.
WARNING! When aliening the position of the pin hole use a bar. NEVER insert your fingers into the
pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-147 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CYLINDERS (FRONT BUCKET RAISE AND TILT, BOOM,
CYLINDERS (FRONT BUCKET RAISE AND TILT, BOOM, ARM,

OUTRIGGERS, AND TELESCOPIC ARM)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Place cylinder (1) on special tool A1.
2. Using special wrenches A4, A5, and A6 unscrew gland nut (4) and
extract it from cylinder (1).
3. Remove piston and ram (6) from cylinder (1).
4. Remove cylinder (1) from special tool A1.
5. Secure piston ram (6) on special tool A1.
6. For boom cylinder piston ram remove dowel bolt (7).
7. For boom cylinder piston ram remove ball bearings (8) and cushion
plunger (9).
30-148 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

8. Loosen piston hexagon (11) using the appropriate socket wrench
A7.
Cylinder Socket Wrench (A7) size
Front bucket (Raising) 55 mm
Front bucket (Tilting) 55 mm

Boom 65 mm
Arm 55 mm
Bucket 55 mm
Outriggers 65 mm
Telescopic Arm 46 mm
★ The seals, dust seals, and guide rings can not be reused. Discard
and replace with new.
★ Carefully check piston hexagon (11). If both caulked areas show
wear, the piston hexagon must be replaced.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-149 2

ASSEMBLY
★ Be extremely careful not to damage the seals and sliding surfaces.
★ Prepare each individual component before final assembly.
1. Gland nut assembly.
A. Mount gasket (12) into the gland nut.
B. Mount gasket (13) into the gland nut.

★ Make sure the lips are turned towards the inside of the
cylinder.
C. Using tool A8, mount guard ring (14).
D. Mount o-ring (15) and the anti-extrusion ring (16) on the out-
side of the gland nut.
2. Piston head assembly.
A. Using tool A9 with the appropriate diameter, mount ring (24),

external seal (25), and the anti-extrusion rings (26) onto piston
(11).
B. Prepare guide ring (27).

★ There are two guide rings (27) for the boom piston.
C. For boom and outrigger pistons only, insert o-ring (28) into the
internal seat.
D. Gauge the diameter of seal (25) for piston (11), mount the
group under a press using tool A3 for the piston diameter.
30-150 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

3. Piston ram assembly.
A. Only for front bucket raise and tilt, boom, arm, bucket, and
outrigger cylinders: Using a press and special tool A2 with the
appropriate diameter, insert bushing (37) into ram (6).
B. Mount bushing A10 of the correct diameter onto the tip of pis-
ton ram (6).
C. Lightly lubricate gland nut seals (4) and slide the group onto
piston ram (6).
Seals (4): ASL800050
D. For the arm cylinder only: Insert spacer (40).
E. Remove bushing A10 and mount piston (11) and lock nut (36)
from the tip of cylinder ram (6).
★ Grease the piston threads.
Lock nut (36): Loctite 262
Lock nut (36):

Front bucket raise: 2845 ±284 Nm (2098 ±210 lbf ft)
Front bucket tilt: 2845 ±284 Nm (2098 ±210 lbf ft)
Arm: 2845 ±284 Nm (2098 ±210 lbf ft)
Bucket: 2845 ±284 Nm (2098 ±210 lbf ft)
Telescopic arm: 1520 ±152 Nm (1121 ±112 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-151 2

F. For boom and outrigger cylinders: Mount cushion plunger
(9), slide eleven ball bearings (8) into the hole, then insert
dowel bolt (7).
Dowel bolt (7): Loctite 262
Dowel bolt (7): 23 ±2 Nm (17 ±2 lbf ft)
G. Screw the complete piston (11) onto piston ram (6), and secure
it with a torque wrench.
Piston (11): 2697 - 3924 Nm (1989 - 2894 lbf ft)
H. Caulk piston (11) to correspond to the slot in cylinder ram (6) not previously used.
4. Cylinder assembly.
A. For boom, arm, and bucket cylinders only: Position bushing

(41) and mount it in gland nut (1) using special tool A2 of the
correct diameter.
★ There are two bushings for the arm cylinder, with a spacer
between them.
★ Leave the cylinder in the same position for subsequent
assembly.
B. Lubricate the threads and first part of gland nut (1).
Gland nut (1): ASL800050
C. Mount the two halves of special tool A11 with the appropriate
diameter at the mouth of cylinder body (4).
D. Mount the cylinder body (4) and cylinder ram assembly (6) on
fixture A1.
E. Guide the piston (centering it) into tool A11.
F. Mount the first guide ring (27) onto the cylinder. Insert part of
the piston into tool A11. For the boom cylinder only: Mount
the second guide ring (27) and fully insert the piston.
★ Insert the piston slowly, in order to calibrate guide rings
(27) without damaging them.
30-152 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

G. Remove tool A11 and bring gland nut (1) and cylinder ram
closer to cylinder (4).
H. Bring cylinder body (4) into position, insert gland nut (1), and
tighten by hand for several turns.
I. Using the correct special wrench A4, A5, or A6 to tighten

gland nut (1) all the way.
Gland nut (1): 932 - 980 Nm (688 - 723 lbf ft)
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-153 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CYLINDER (BOOM SWING)
CYLINDER (BOOM SWING)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Place cylinder (1) on fixture A1. Engage the fulcrum pins into the suitable support.
2. Using special wrench A6, loosen and completely extract gland nut (2) from cylinder (1).
3. Remove brake cylinder (3).
4. Attach the piston head to the mobile group of fixture A1.
5. Remove piston ram (4) from the cylinder.
6. Remove the cylinder from the fixture.
7. Secure the complete piston ram (4) to fixture A1.
8. Raise the part caulked for safety purposes, then using special tool A7 unscrew piston (5).
★ Carefully check piston (5). If both caulked areas show wear, the piston must be replaced.
9. Remove snap ring (6) from the piston, then remove ring (7) and scraper ring (8).
★ Make a note for order of assembly for ring (7).
10. Using a puller, remove swing bushings (9) from the cylinder axle oscillation pins.
11. Disassemble the groups by removing all the seals, guard rings, guide rings, and the piston fulcrum bushings.
★ Discard the seals, guard rings, and guide rings. They must be replaced with new.
30-154 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

ASSEMBLY
★ Be extremely careful not to damage the seals and sliding surfaces.
★ Prepare each individual component before final assembly.
1. Gland nut assembly.
A. Mount gaskets (10) and (11) into gland nut (2).

★ Make sure the lips for gasket (11) are turned towards the
inside of the cylinder.
2. Mount scraper ring (12).
3. Mount o-ring (13), anti-extrusion ring (14), and last o-ring (15) of
the front seal.
4. Cylinder gland assembly.
A. Using tool A9 with the appropriate diameter, mount rubber

ring (16) and seal ring (17) onto the piston. Then remove tool
A9 and mount the anti-extrusion rings (18).
B. Prepare guide ring (19).
C. Mount o-ring (20) into the internal seat.
D. Gauge the diameter of seal (16) of the piston, mounting the

group under a press using tool A3 for the piston diameter.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-155 2

5. Piston ram assembly.
A. Using a press and special tool A2 with the appropriate diame-

ter, insert bushing (21) into ram head (4).
B. Insert ring (8) into the piston ram.

★ Carefully check the direction of assembly for ring (8).
C. Insert scraper ring (7) and secure the group with snap ring (6).
D. Mount bushing A10 of the correct diameter onto the tip of pis-
ton ram (4).
E. Lightly lubricate gland nut gasket (2) and slide the group onto
piston ram (4).
Gasket (2): ASL800050
F. Lubricate o-ring seal (22) and screw piston (5) onto piston ram
(4) by hand several turns.
O-ring seal (22): ASL800050
G. Position the group on tool A1 and tighten the piston (5) with
round prong wrench A7.
Piston (5): 932 - 980 Nm (688 - 723 lbf ft)
30-156 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

6. Cylinder assembly.
A. Secure gland nut (1) to fixture A1. Engage the pivot pins in the suitable support.
B. Lubricate the threads and first part of gland nut (1).
Gland nut (1): ASL800050
C. Mount the two halves of special tool A11 with the appropriate diameter at the mouth of cylinder body (4).
D. Mount the piston ram assembly on fixture A1.
E. Center piston (5) in tool A11.
F. Wind the first guide ring (19) around the piston and insert part of the piston into tool A11. Wind the second guide ring
(19) and fully insert the piston.
★ Insert the piston slowly, in order to calibrate guide rings (27) without overheating them.
G. Insert gland nut (2) and tighten it by hand for several turns
H. Using special wrench A6, tighten the gland nut all the way.
Gland nut: 932 - 980 Nm (688 - 723 lbf ft)
I. Screw the brake cylinder (3) into cylinder (1).
Brake cylinder (3): Loctite 270
Brake cylinder (3): 804 Nm (593 lbf ft)
J. Remove the cylinder from fixture A1.
K. Using a press and appropriate tool A2, mount swing bushings (9).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-157 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BOOM SAFETY CYLINDER
BOOM SAFETY CYLINDER
REMOVAL
WARNING! Center the backhoe, rest the back of

bucket on the ground, keeping the arm
vertical, lower the outriggers.
1. Make sure that safety stop (1) is raised.
2. Stop the engine and release the residual hydraulic pressure.

3. Remove cotter pins (2), then remove pin (3).
4. Disconnect hydraulic hose (4) that feeds cylinder (5), then plug it
to prevent entry of impurities.
5. Remove snap ring (6), then remove cylinder (5).
30-158 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BOOM SAFETY CYLINDER
INSTALLATION
• Install the hose (4) without twisting or interference.
Pin seats: ASL800050
★ Install new cotter pins.
1. Start the engine and perform several lock and release manoeuvres to fill the safety cylinder and bleed air from the unit.
For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-159 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE WORK EQUIPMENT
BACKHOE WORK EQUIPMENT
REMOVAL
1. Extend the arm completely and fully open the bucket. Lower the
equipment until it is resting on the ground.

moving.

lines.
2. Remove the boom cylinder. See “BACKHOE BOOM CYLIN-

DER” on page 30-136..
3. Remove bracket (2) located inside the boom. Disconnect hoses (1)
from the arm cylinder, then plug them to prevent entry of impuri-
ties.
★ Mark hoses to prevent exchanging positions during reconnec-
tion.
4. Remove bracket (3)

★ Mark hoses to prevent exchanging positions during reconnec-
tion.
5. Sling work equipment (4), and attach to a hoist. Apply slight ten-
sion to the sling.
6. Remove snap rings and pin (5).
7. Slowly remove work equipment (4), checking that there is no inter-

ference.
★ Be very careful not to damage any hydraulic hoses.
Work Equipment (4): 850 kg (1,874 lbs)
30-160 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE WORK EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
★ Pass the cylinder hoses through the inside of brackets (6).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-161 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BUCKET
BACKHOE BUCKET
REMOVAL
WARNING! Place the bucket on a level surface,

resting on its back.
1. Remove safety pin (1) and connecting pin (2) between bucket (3)
and tie rams (4).
2. Remove safety pin (5) then pin (6) that attaches bucket (3) to arm
(7).
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
30-162 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BUCKET
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-163 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE ARM
BACKHOE ARM
REMOVAL
1. Remove the bucket. See “BACKHOE BUCKET” on page 30-162.
2. Remove the bucket cylinder. See “BACKHOE BUCKET CYLIN-

DER” on page 30-142.
3. Remove lock nut (2) with washers, pin (3), and levers (4).
4. Start the engine and bring the arm into a vertical position, then
lower it to the ground.
5. Stop the engine and release the residual pressure arm cylinder (5).
the sling. Remove Bolt (6) and pin (7), then rest cylinder (5) on
block (A).
7. Start the engine and retract piston (8) completely.

★ Secure the piston head ram with wire.
8. Sling arm (9), and attach to a hoist. Apply slight tension to the
sling. Remove bolts and pin (10).
9. Remove arm (9).
Arm (9): 213 kg (470 lbs) - WB140-2 245 kg (540 lbs)

- WB150-2
30-164 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE ARM
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
★ Completely tighten lock nut (2), then back off one half turn.
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-165 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TELESCOPIC ARM (COMPLETE)
TELESCOPIC ARM (COMPLETE)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the bucket. See “BACKHOE BUCKET” on page 30-162.
2. Remove bucket cylinder and link (1). See “BACKHOE BUCKET

CYLINDER” on page 30-142.
3. Remove lock nut (2) with the washer, pin (3), then cylinder link
(4).
WARNING! Loosen the oil filler cap slowly to release the pressure inside the hydraulic tank. Then
operate the control levers several times to release the remaining pressure in the
hydraulic lines.
4. Disconnect telescopic arm hoses (5) and (6), the bucket cylinder
hoses (7) and (8), then the auxiliary equipment hoses (9) and (10).
Plug the hoses to prevent entry of impurities.
★ Mark hydraulic hoses (5), (6), (7), (8), (9), and (10) before
separation, in order to reassemble them in the same position as
before separation.
5. Remove clamp (11).
6. Remove the telescopic arm the same as the standard backhoe arm.
See “BACKHOE ARM” on page 30-164.
Telescopic Arm: 392 kg (864 lbs)
30-166 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-167 2

INNER ARM
REMOVAL
1. Remove bucket (1). See “BACKHOE BUCKET” on page 30-162.
2. Remove bucket cylinder (2) and link (3). See “BACKHOE

BUCKET CYLINDER” on page 30-142.
3. Remove the telescopic arm cylinder. See “TELESCOPIC ARM

★ For safety, plug all the disconnected hoses and to prevent entry
of impurities.
4. Remove lock nut (4) with washer, pin (5), and links (6).
5. Attach chains to inner arm (7) as shown, and attach to a hoist.

★ Attach chains to the bucket pin hole and the safety pin holes
6. Start the engine, and maintaining constant tension on the section of

chain connected to the bucket coupling, slowly raise the boom until
both sections of chain are under slight tension.
7. Stop engine and loosen the upper guide adjustment bolts, then the
lower guide adjustment dowel bolts by several turns. Refer to step
7 of “INNER ARM GUIDES” on page -170
★ Loosen the adjustment bolts on both sides.
8. Slide inner arm (7) out.
Inner Arm: 160 kg (353 lbs)
30-168 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

12
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-169 2

INNER ARM GUIDES

REMOVAL
1. Remove the backhoe bucket. See “BACKHOE BUCKET” on

page 30-162.
2. Partially extend inner arm (1).
3. Rest outer arm (2) on a trestle (A) about 80 cm (32 in) high.
4. Loosen and remove adjustment bolts (3) with lock washers, then
remove upper guides (4).
5. Attach chains to inner arm (1) as shown, and attach to a hoist.

★ Attach chains to the bucket pin hole and the safety pin holes
6. Slowly raise inner arm (1) until it rests on the supporting surfaces
of the upper guides (4).
7. Loosen nuts (5), then remove lower guide adjustment dowel bolts
(6).
8. Raise lower guides (7) and slide them out.
INSTALLATION
1. Adjust the clearances, keeping inner arm (1) aligned with outer
arm (2). For details, see section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUST-
ING."
30-170 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-171 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BOOM
BACKHOE BOOM
REMOVAL
1. Remove the backhoe arm. See “BACKHOE ARM” on page 30-
164.
2. Remove the backhoe arm cylinder. See “BACKHOE ARM CYL-

INDER” on page 30-138.
3. Start the engine, lower the boom and rest it on a wooden block on
the ground.
4. Remove the backhoe boom cylinder. See “BACKHOE BOOM

5. Remove bracket (1). Disconnect hydraulic hoses (2), then plug

them to prevent entry of impurities.
★ Mark hydraulic hoses (2) before separation, in order to reas-
6. Sling boom (3) as shown, and attach to a hoist. Apply slight tension
to the sling.
7. Take out snap rings, remove pin (4), then lift and remove boom (3)
Boom (3): 323 kg (778 lbs)
30-172 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE BOOM
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
★ Pass the cylinder hydraulic hoses inside bracket (5).
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-173 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE SWING BRACKET
BACKHOE SWING BRACKET
REMOVAL
1. Remove the backhoe work equipment. See “BACKHOE WORK
EQUIPMENT” on page 30-160.
2. Remove screws (1) and pins (2) that connect swing cylinder (3).
3. Remove boom safety cylinder (4). See “BOOM SAFETY CYLIN-

DER” on page 30-158.
4. Remove snap (5), pin (6), and link (7).
5. Sling swing bracket (8) as shown, and attach to a hoist. Apply

slight tension to the sling.
6. Remove bolts (9) and (10), then remove swing bracket axle oscilla-
tion pins (11) and (12).
7. Remove swing bracket (8), being careful not to lose or damage the
clearance adjustment shims (13).
Swing Bracket (8): 133 kg (293 lbs)
30-174 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE SWING BRACKET
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
Pin (6): ASL800050
★ Insert shims (13).
1. Start the engine and bleed air from the cylinders. For details, see
section 20 "TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT".
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-175 2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY BACKHOE OUTRIGGERS
BACKHOE OUTRIGGERS
REMOVAL
WARNING! Position the backhoe with the work

equipment centered, with the arm verti-
cal, and the back of the bucket on the
ground.

moving.
1. Rest the outrigger supports on the ground and stop engine.
2. Sling outrigger cylinder (1) as shown, and attach to a hoist. Apply

3. Remove nut (2), bolt (3), then pin (4).
4. Start the engine and retract cylinder (1) piston rod.
5. Raise cylinder (1) to a vertical position and secure it in place with

strap (A).
6. Sling outrigger support (5) as shown, and attach to a hoist. Apply

7. Remove nut (6), bolt (7), and pin (8).
30-176 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

8. With the hoist raise support (5) until it is in a horizontal position.
Remove nut (9), bolt (10), and pin (11), then remove support (5).
9. Repeat the same procedure for the other side.
INSTALLATION
the pin hole.
WB140-2N WB150-2N 30-177 2

30-178 2 WB140-2N WB150-2N

90 OTHERS
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (WB150-2N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (WB140-2N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-5
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-7
AIR CONDITIONER CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-9
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 90-1

OTHERS
12
90-2 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (WB150-2N)
12
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (WB150-2N)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 90-3

12
90-4 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (WB140-2N)
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 90-5

12
90-6 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

OTHERS ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
R/N1
R-N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
R-N1 M-V1 R/N1
N1
N1
N1
L1.5 B-R1.5 A-N1
G-R1
R/N1
A-N1
G1
N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R/N1
R1
N1
R1
H19
N1
A2.5 G2.5 A-N1 A-R1 A-R1 L-G1.5 R/N1
H10
H12
H13
H14
H22
H24
H25
HA2
H11
H23
WINDSHIELD P1- P3 - P4 -
H9
A A-R1 2 2 6 7 9
H33 H34 A
57
57
1 9 8 5 10
H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7
59c
59c
WIPER MOTOR 1 0 1 0
R1
OFF ACC
R1 ACC BR R2 C
1 0
1 9
1 0
1 9
1 0
1 9 1 0 1 9
H20 H32 H21 H30 M
H17 H18
ST
rpm q t∞
NOT CONNECTED S i S i S i NOT CONNECTED
+ +
10
4
S3A 5 10
S4A 7
S6 B +
N1 31
6 3 1 3 5 10
S2A NON MONTATO
N1 31
5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10
NOT CONNECTED
G/N1
R1
M-N1
Z-N1
A-V1
B/N1
A-B1
M-N1
M-N1
S3L
V-B1
A/V1
V-B1
G-R1
G-R1
Z/B1
L/N1
A-G1
R-V1
R/N1
H/N1
R/N1
B/R1
A/N1
S1
V-N1
B1
S1
V1
V-N1
A1
V-N1
S1L S4L S5L
L/N1
G1
G1
B-R1
N1
R-N1.5
B-R1
B-R1
G-N1
B-R1
A/R1
B-G1
B-G1
L/B1
5 4 3 2 1
0A001283
R6
X24
L-B1
3
6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
X41
A-R1
XS
2
Z/N1
R/N1
A-N1
G1
N1
G-N1
N1
X33
7
B L-G1.5
A-R1
6
G-N1
B
5
A/R1 4
N1 A-N1 3
B-G1 V-N1
1
2
B-G1 V-N1
1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
6
27
A-R1 0A003016 0A001945
A-B1
M-N1
M-N1
G2.5
R-N1.5
G-R1
B/N1
B-R1.5
5
A2.5
A2.5
Z/N1
V-B1
L1.5
L/N1
Z/B1
L/B1
M-V1
A-G1
G1
R6
A-N1
B-R1
R-V1
R/N1
H/N1
R1
R1
N1
N1
N1
V1
S1
A1
G1
N1
1
S1A
0
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
C 4 3 2 1
C
1
X15
Z-N1
X17
X26
X31
Z-B1
R/N1
X18 S10
A-R1
R-N1.5
M-V1
R-G1
B-R1.5
A-G1
G/N1
G/N1
G-R1
A-N1
R/N1
H/N1
R-V1
B/N1
A-B1
L1.5
X29
G2.5
Z/N1
V-B1
C-L1
S-G1
L/N1
Z/B1
N2.5
A2.5
A2.5
L/B1
R6
V1
S1
A1
G1
G1
N1
R1
R1
N1
N1
C-L1
V-N2.5
N0.5
L0.5
N1
R-V1 R-V1
B1
V2.5
A1.5
B1.5
V2.5
N1
B1
5
HEATING MOTOR
N1
M-V1 M-V1 N1
K05 S1 0A003260
M1
4 2
L-B1 3
L-B1
86 87a 87 X39 NOT CONNECTED M/N1
1
A1 A1
S27
V2.5
V2.5
15/1 30/3 L/6 15/1 30/3 L/6
A-B1
2
A-B1 L0.5 Y6 86 87 2 3 4 Y3 0 1 0 1
15/1 30/3 L/6
1
N0.5
C
B
NOT NOT S3 NOT
GEAR SHIFT
85 30 M1 A CONNECTED CONNECTED CONNECTED

MA
2 1 4 3 2 1 49/4 30b/2 R/7

85 30 + 1 49/4 30B/2 R/7 49/4 30B/2 R/7
R/N1
R/N1
H-G1.5
X45
N0.5
N
C-N1
X25
B-N1
B-N1
R1.5
S-G1
S-G1
X20
N1
N1
S2
L4
V/N1
V/N1
K06
N1
2
3
Z1.5
0A002211 C-N1
A-R1
I
15
4 15 I
H-R1 N1
V-N2.5
V-N2.5
53M 53M
N2.5
5
B-N1
V2.5
B1.5
A1.5
T
C-L1
0 MA
T
D XD2 31
31 D
MI
X19
SM2
A1 A1
9
A-B1 8 A-B1
V-B1 B/V1 C-L1
7
6
H1
C-N1
M-V1 5 M-V1
SM3
R-V1 4 R-G1
3
G/N1 2 G/N1 X28
G/N1 1
G/N1
12 C/B1
JOYSTICK
SM4
11
M-V1 10
G-V1
54D
9
N1 N1
L
8
C-L1
54S
7 M/N1
C-N1
SM6 SM5
6
31
M-B1
49
5
E M/N1
4 E
LIGHTS SWITCH
C/B1
3
C-B1 C-B1
57/58
2
30
N1 M-N1
1 1
A/B1
2
56b
C1
3
V1.5 M-V1
4
G-V1.5 M-N1
56a
5
A-G1
6
L1 B-R1
7 1
H-N1.5 B/R1 C-N1
8 2
FLASHER UNIT
R-N1.5 A-N1
9 3
A1
1
4
L1
XD1 5
6
N1 Y1
7
L/N1
8
2
R-G1
9
A/N1 N1
10
A-G1
11
F 12
A-B1
A/B1
V/N1 F
13
EV4
SX
H-G1.5
G-V1.5
R-N1.5
H-N1.5
R-N1.5
DX
B-R1.5
M-N1
H-R1
A-G1
V-B1
H/N1
Z/N1
A-R1
R/N1
B-R1
Z/B1
R1.5
L/N1
V1.5
L/B1
Z1.5
S1
V1
L1.5
G1
C1
N1
X40
Z-N1
A-V1
A-V1
M-N1
A/V1
G1.5
Z-B1
H-L1
C-L1
R-G1
G-R1
G-N1
M-B1
M/N1
G-R1
R-N1
G-V1
A2.5
A2.5
A-R1
A-N1
R/N1
B-N1
R-V1
R-V1
S1
V-N1
B1
X27
G1
R1
N1
R-N1.5
H-L1
G-N1
A-N1
G1
N1 N1 N1
X32
6
V/N1 V/N1
X9
X8
X5
5
X2
H15
H1 C/B1
4
S15 HA3 C/B1

3
C/B1
EV2
R-N1.5
XC1 C-B1
N1.5
B/N1
B/V1
N2.5
N2.5
N2.5
2
N1
L0.5
N1.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2
HA4 M-N1 M-N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
1
+15
NAME DESCRIPTION
X21
X30
N1
N1.5
N1.5
EV1 OPENED GRAB SOLENOID VALVE
N1
N1
RADIO TO
N
C-B1
K3 R26 1 2 3 1 2
CONDITIONING
A-V1
G2.5
EV2
B-R1
CLOSED GRAB SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY EV1
R1
86 87a 87
D14
R6
D4
L4
KIT
B/N1
B/V1
R-N1.5
N1
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID VALVE
N1.5
G EV3 1/4W
D20 G
REAR 1^ BOOM UNLOCK SOLENOID VALVE 85 30 4 3 2 1
EV4 N1
N2.5
N1.5
X14
X12
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
F1A LOW BEAM FUSE 15A
L26 1 2 3 M-N1
F1B
K9 M5
RIGHT TRAFFIC LIGHT FUSE 3A R31 EV3
S24
D19
+
B-R1.5
D18
A-V1
G2.5
R1.5
+15 M
F1C LEFT TRAFFIC LIGHT 3A +15
L4
R4
R C
F2A ROTATING LAMP FUSE 10A L12 L22 L19 L14 L13 D5 L11 L17 L18 L20
RELAIS "K4" NOT
K7 R5 COPNNECTED R3 F3A 0A000571 N1
F2B RADIO CABIN LAMP FUSE 7.5A R27 F3C 1/4W
86 87a 87 1/4W 7.5A
F2C WARNING FUSE 10A 1/4W 7.5A F2C R12 F6C R22 F5C R19 F4A R14 F3B R13 F2B R11 F5A R17 F5B R18 F6A R20 S19
D8 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W
F3A STARTING FUSE 7.5A 1/4W 1/4W 7.5A 15A 15A 15A
85 30 L5 10A 10A 15A
7.5A 7.5A
L3
SWITCH+WARNING LIGHT+RETURN TO DIG FUSE 7.5A
R4
F3B 1/4W
OPTIONAL VALVE FUSE 7.5A L27
A-N1.5
F3C
D17
D16
D15
H H
H/N1
+30 +15 +15 +15 +15 +30 +15 +15 +15
D21
L4
D22
0A002248
S1
F4A 4WD VALVE-WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER FUSE 7.5A
V1
V-B1
F4B FORWARD-REVERSE SPEED FUSE 10A
F4C HIGH BEAM FUSE 15A R32 HA1

BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH 15A X4 S22 S23 S21
F5A X7
1 p p t
F5B REAR WORKING LIGHT SWITCH FUSE 15A 2 1
3 2
F5C FRONT WORKING LIGHT SWITCH FUSE 15A 4 3 t
F6A WINDSHIELD WIPER-WASHER SWITCH FUSE 15A 5 4
N1.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
6 5
F6B LIGHTS SWITCH POWER FUSE 7.5A 7

8
6
7
L23
F6C WARNING POWER FUSE 10A 9 8

10 9
F7A MONITOR POWER FUSE 7.5A 11
I F7B HORN FUSE 10A I

D13 F7A R23
F7C FUEL SHUT OFF FUSE 7.5A
7.5A 1/4W
FUG1 GENERAL FUSE 60A
FUG2 PREHEATING FUSE 80A

FUEL SHUT OFF POWER FUSE 30A
+15 X16
FUG3 +15
N1 N1
A-V1 B
A-V1
FUG4 GENERATOR FUSE 80A F4B R15 +30 A
G1 BATTERY 10A 1/4W K5

D6 86 87a 87
+15 +30
G2 GENERATOR
N1.5
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
L15 +30
K8
H1 PREHEATING WARNING LIGHT K6 85 30
86 87a 87
R25 F7C R6 F2A R10 F1C L7 F1B L8 XAD
86 87a 87 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W Z-B1
H10 CONVERTER OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT 7.5A 10A 3A 3A l
J D7
Z/B1 J
H11 4WD WARNING LIGHT F1A R28 D9 85 30 R7 R8 -
R2
85 30
1/4W L25 D12 L6 L10 1/4W 1/4W
H12 FUEL RESERVE WARNING LIGHT K2 K1 15A
1/4W R1 F4C X13
R9
R29
86 87a 87
H13 KOMATSU LOGO LIGHT
D3
86 87a 87
D1 1/4W
L21 L24 L4
l
L4
R16 1/4W
L28 -
H14 KOMATSU LOGO LIGHT
85 30 L2 85 30 1/4W
15A
D10
1/4W
R21 F7B R24 XT2 KT2
H15 CIGARETTE LIGHTER LAMP
L29 L9 N1
CABIN LAMP
J2 L1 F6B 1/4W
10A
1/4W
D11 R4 X11 R4 G/N1
1 53S
H16 L16 R4 R4 R4
2 15
1 2 3 P4 7.5 01170827 +30
G2.5
1
G2.5
R-V1
M1
3
H17 FRONT WORKING LAMP 2 4 53M
3 31
H18 FRONT WORKING LAMP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 +15 +15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1
H19 BEACON LAMP
X1
X6
X3
H2 GENERATOR WARNING LIGHT

K K
H20 REAR WORKING LIGHT
Z-N1.5
L-B1
N1.5
R-N1.5
A-N1.5
A-G1
S-N1
V-B1
Z/N1
Z-B1
N1.5
H/N1
B-R1
B-N1
S1
V1
H-L1
Z-B1
H-R1
V-N1
0A000405
G/N1
H21 REAR WORKING LIGHT
X10
H22
Z/B1
INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT
A-N1.5 1
A-N1.5
H23 HIGH BEAM WARNING LIGHT H/N1

S1
2
3
H/N1
S1
K01
86 87
H24 LOW LEVEL BRAKE OIL WARNING LIGHT
R-N1.5
4
5 R-N1.5
V-B1 V-B1
H25 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK WARNING LIGHT
Z/N1
6
7 Z/N1 85 30
H-L1
Z-B1
H-R1
H28
N1
N1
RIGHT FRONT INDICATOR 8

N1
G2.5
Z-B1 Z-B1
B-N1
9
M-V1 M-V1
H29 LEFT FRONT INDICATOR
B-N1
10
11 B-N1
ENGINE WATER HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT R-V1 R-V1
H3 A-V1
12
13 A-V1
X38
X41
H30 REAR LEFT INDICATOR B A

L D C B A
L
M-V1
C-L1
H32 REAR RIGHT INDICATOR
N1
H33 REAR RIGHT LIGHT
H34 REAR LEFT LIGHT R30

V-N1
X44
X43
N1
N1
N1
1 2
H4 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT
Z-N1.5
A-G1
H-N1
L-B1
S-N1
S26 Y5 Y4 Y2
N1
N1
A-B1
N1.5
N1.5
H-N1
B-R1
X42
A1
H5 AIR FILTER WARNING LIGHT
t
X22
X23
H-N1
S16
M10
H6 HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER WARNING LIGHT
B A
S18
X37
X36
S17 N1
H7 OPTIONAL WARNING LAMP p
M10
B1.5
R10
M-V1
C-L1
B-R1
1 2 l
M-V1
-
R4
L4
H8 OPTIONAL WARNING LAMP
FUG4
FUG2
FUG3
1 2 1 2
K07 K02
N1.5
N1.5
N2.5
N1.5
N1.5
N1.5
B-R1
B-R1
86 87a 87
N1
N1
N1
N1
H9 ENGINE WATER HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LAMP
HA1 HORN WINSHIELD FUG1 86 87
M S28 85 30 M
HA2 BUZZER OPTIONAL WASHER PUMP 0A002932 0A002211
60A 80A 30A 80A
H29 H28 NOT CONNECTED 85 30
C-L1
H-N1
HA3 REAR HORN
M10
N1
N1
HA4 BUZZER
Z-B1
B-R1
K01 STARTER RELAY R50
XT1 KT1
K02 PREHEATING RELAY N1
G2.5
Z/N1
R10
R10
1 53S
B-R1
K03 FUEL SHUT OFF RELAY G1
2 53M
S13 - l
B/R1
3
K04 POWERED BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4 31
NAME DESCRIPTION NAME DESCRIPTION NAME DESCRIPTION NAME DESCRIPTION
XA
15
K05 RETURN TO DIG RELAY
N1.5
K06 P2 S2L X14 FRONT LINE-CROSS LINE 4 WAY CONNECTOR X4 MONITOR 11 WAY CONNECTOR
N1
N1
N1
POWER ECONOMY UNIT HOUR COUNTER WINDSHIELD WIPER-WASHER SWITCH ON LAT. DASHBOARD 30 50
D+
R50
B/R1
M1 G2
B1.5
K07 GEAR RELAY P3 FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR S3A FRONT WORKING LIGHT SWITCH ON FRONT DASHBOARD X15 START KEY 4 WAY CONNECTOR X40 FLASHER UNIT 13 WAY CONNECTOR M 30
G W
N K03 N
K1 FORWARD SPEED RELAY P4 WATER TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT S3L BEACON SWITCH ON LAT. DASHBOARD X16 CONDITIONER CLUTCH 2 WAY CONNECTOR XC1 12 VOLT CURRENT INTAKE
G1 3
86 87
K2 REVERSE SPEED RELAY R30 HEATING START S4 BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH X17 LATERAL DASHBOARD 21 WAY CONNECTOR X42 SWITCH GEAR 2 WAY PACKARD U
12Vcc 31 85 30
K3 4 WHEELS DRIVE RELAY( SHUTTLE ONLY) R31 FUEL LEVEL SENDER S4A WARNING SWITCH ON FRONT DASHBOARD X18 FRONT CABLE 5 WAY CONNECTOR X43 RELAY DIFFERENTIAL LOCK 2 WAY AMP
B1.5
G1
K5 LOW BEAM RELAY R32 WATER TEMPERATURE SENDER S4L HORN SWITCH ON LAT. DASHBOARD X19 FRONT DASHBOARD 9 WAY CONNECTOR X44 SWITCH GEAR SIGNAL 2 WAY YASAKI
K6 S1 S5L X2 LIGHTS SWITCH AND GEAR SHIFT LINE 9 WAY CONNECTOR X45 POWER ECONOMY UNIT CONNECTOR
N50
MAIN BEAM RELAY ECONOMY POWER PUSH BUTTON OPTIONAL SWITCH ON LAT. DASHBOARD
K7 LIGHTS SWITCH RELAY S10 HAMMER BUTTON S6 STARTING SWITCH X20 BLOWER MOTOR 4 WAY CONNECTOR X5 CABIN COMMAND 11 WAY CONNECTOR
XAM
X21 FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR 3 WAY CONNECTOR X6 N1.5 N1.5 Y0
K8 HORN RELAY S13 BATTERY STOP SWITCH SM2 CONTROL-SQUARE BUTTON SOLENOID VALVES LINE 9 WAY CONNECTOR
R-N1.5
1
2
R-N1.5
B1.5 B1.5
K9 FLASHER UNIT S15 HAND BRAKE SWITCH SM3 CLOSED GRAB BUTTON X22 WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP 2 WAY CONNECTOR X7 NOT CONNECTED 9 WAY CONNECTOR 3
KT1 FUEL SHUT OFF TIMER S16 BRAKE OIL LOW LEVEL SWITCH SM4 CONVERTER DETACHMENT BUTTON X23 OPTIONAL 2 WAY CONNECTOR X8 LATERAL DASHBOARD 17 WAY CONNECTOR
KT2 PREHEATING TIMER S17 PEDAL SWITCH SM5 OPENED GRAB BUTTON X24 WINDSHIELD WIPER 4 WAY CONNECTOR X9 FRONT DASHBOARD 17 WAY CONNECTOR
O O
M1 STARTER MOTOR S18 PEDAL SWITCH SM6 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK BUTTON X25 POWERED BLOWER MOTOR 2 WAY CONNECTOR XA GENERATOR 2WAY CONNECTOR
M2 WASHER PUMP S19 STOP LIGHT SWITCH Y0 FUEL SHUT OFF SOLENOID VALVE X26 REAR LINE 8 WAY CONNECTOR XAD DIODE 2 WAY CONNECTOR
WIRING COLOURS
M3 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR S1A 4 WD SWITCH ON FRONT DASHBOARD Y1 ECONOMY POWER SOLENOID VALVE X27 VALVES LINE 6 WAY CONNECTOR XAM FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE 3 WAY CONNECTOR
A LIGHTBLUE
M4 BLOWER MOTOR S1L REAR WORKING LIGHT SWITCH ON LAT. DASHBOARD Y2 4 WD SOLENOID VALVE X28 JOYSTICK 12 WAY CONNECTOR XD1 LIGHTS SWITCH 9 WAY CONNECTOR B WHITE
C ORANGE
M5 FUEL PUMP S2 REAR 1^ BOOM UNLOCK SWITCH Y3 PLATE UNLOCK SOLENOID VALVE X29 CONVERT DETACHMENT BUTTON 2 WAY CONNECTOR XD2 GEAR SHIFT 5 WAY CONNECTOR G YELLOW
X3 FRONT LINE 11 WAY CONNECTOR XS H GREY
M8 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR S20 STOP LIGHT SWITCH Y4 FORWARD SPEED SOLENOID VALVE MULTIFUNCTION INSTRUMENT 6 WAY CONNECTOR
L BLUE
H3 ENGINE WATER HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT S21 ENGINE WATER HIGH TEMPERATURE SWITCH Y5 REVERSE SPEED SOLENOID VALVE X30 FUEL PUMP 2 WAY CONNECTOR XT1 FUEL SHUT OFF TIMER 4 WAY CONNECTOR M BROWN
N BLACK
M1 STARTER MOTOR S22 AIR FILTER BLOCKED SWITCH Y6 RETURN TO DIG SOLENOID VALVE X31 CABIN 5 WAY CONNECTOR XT2 PREHEATING TIMER 4 WAY CONNECTOR R RED
X32 RADIO POWER 2 WAY CONNECTOR S PINK
M2 WASHER PUMP S23 ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE SWITCH XC1 CIGARETTE LIGHTER
V GREEN
M3 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR S24 FUEL GAUGE X1 FRONT LINE(ENGINE) 11 WAY CONNECTOR X33 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND BEACON 7 WAY CONNECTOR Z VIOLET
P P
M4 BLOWER MOTOR S26 CONVERT. OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE SWITCH X10 FRONT LINE-ENGINE LINE 13 WAY CONNECTOR X36 RIGHT FRONT INDICATOR WAY CONNECTOR EXAMPLE:
M5 FUEL PUMP S27 NPN SENSOR X11 POWER 3 WAY CONNECTOR X37 LEFT FRONT INDICATOR WAY CONNECTOR G/V ->YELLOW/GREEN
(TRANSVERSE COLOURS)
M8 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR S28 GEAR SWITCH X12 FRONT LINE-CROSS LINE 3 WAY CONNECTOR X38 FORWARD-REVERSE SPEED VALVES 4 WAY CONNECTOR
G-V ->YELLOW-GREEN
S2A X39 PROXIMITY 3 WAY CONNECTOR (LONGITUDINAL COLOURS)
P1 RPM INSTRUMENT WINSHIELD WIPER-WASHER SWITCH ON FRONT DASHBOARD X13 FRONT LINE-ENGINE LINE 2 WAY CONNECTOR
RKZ05020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 90-7

12
90-8 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

AIR CONDITIONER CIRCUIT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
87
1 9
86
1 0
K04
0 86 87a 87
5 10
CONNECT WITH PRESETTING SOCKET
INSIDE LATERAL DASHBOARD 85 30
9 5 10 1
85
X58 X56 X57 X56
30
G-V1
N1
X54 3° FAN SPEED RELAY
H-G1 CONNECT TO "S4" POSITION "1"
(BLOWER MOTOR SPEED SWITCH )
N1 GROUND CONNECTION (BLACK)

(FROM OPTIONAL LAMP SWITCH CONN.)
V1 X53 INTERFACE WITH EXTANT WIRE A-V1

K10 (INSIDE LATERAL DASHBOARD )
WIRING COLOURS
86 87a 87
C1
85 30 A LIGHTBLUE
X16
85 30 86 87 CONNECT WITH PRESETTING A B WHITE
X55 CONNECTOR NEAR GENERATOR X16
X55 X55 X55 B
C ORANGE
N1 V-N1 G YELLOW
G-V1 G-V1 H GREY

COMPRESSOR
A B L BLUE
ELECTROMAGNETIC
X59 X59 CLUTCH
M BROWN
V-N1 N BLACK
G-V1 R RED
S PINK
2 1 2 1
V GREEN
X62 X62 X61 X60 Z VIOLET

X33
S40 S10 X20
p 4 EXAMPLE:
t X20
CONNECT WITH PREVIOUS 3
HEATER MOTOR CONNECTOR X20 G/V ->YELLOW/GREEN (TRANSVERSE MARKED)
2
X20
1 BLACK YELLOW GREEN
M4
M
G-V ->YELLOW-GREEN(LONGITUDINAL COLOURS)
NAME DESCRIPTION NAME DESCRIPTION
YELLOW GREEN
K04 3° FAN SPEED RELAY X56 A/C SWITCH SWF CONNECTOR
K10 COMPRESSOR ELECTROMAGNETIC CLUTCH CONTROL RELAY X57 AMP 1 WAY CONNECTOR HEATER/CONDITIONING
M4 FAN MOTOR
MOTOR UNIT
X58 AMP 1 WAY CONNECTOR
R33 SPEED RESISTOR X59 2 WAY CONNECTOR

RKZ07450
S10 NO FROST THERMOSTAT X60 NO FROST THERMOSTAT 1 WAY CONNECTOR
S39 A/C SWITCH X61 NO FROST THERMOSTAT 1 WAY CONNECTOR
S40 A/C SAFETY SYSTEM PRESSURE SWITCH X62 SAFETY PRESSURE SWITCH AMP MINITIMER 4 WAY CONNECTOR
X53 AMP 1 WAY CONNECTOR X16 COMPRESSOR ELECTROMAGNETIC CLUTCH 2 WAY CONNECTOR
X54 FEMALE FASTON X20 HEATER/CONDITIONING MOTOR UNIT AMP 4 WAY CONNECTOR
X55 MINI-RELAY CONNECTOR C1 COMPRESSOR ELECTROMAGNETIC CLUTCH
WB140-2N, WB150-2N 90-9

90-10 WB140-2N, WB150-2N

PROPOSAL FOR MANUAL OR CSS REVISION
Data Kom Publishing Division

440 North Fairway Drive
Vernon Hills, Il. 60061-8112 U.S.A.
Fax No. (847)-970-4186
DATE: FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY -- No.PMR
NAME OF COMPANY: CITY:

PROPOSER
STATE OR PROVINCE:
DEPARTMENT: COUNTRY:
NAME: FAX:
MANUAL DESCRIPTION: CSS PROGRAM - e.g: Lookup, Parts or Service
MANUAL OR CSS CD NO: CSS PROGRAM RELEASE VERSION:
MANUAL OR CSS CD ISSUE DATE: CSS BOOK PUBLISHER:
BOOK DISCRIPTION
MACHINE MODEL & S/N:
MANUAL SECTION/PAGE NUMBERS OR CSS REFERENCE & PAGE NUMBERS
PROBLEM:
Attach photos or sketches.

If more space is needed, use another sheet.
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

10 WB140-2 Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

10 WB140-2 Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEBM009802

May 2003 Copyright 2003 Komatsu

10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

20 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

00-2 c WB140-2N, WB150-2N

DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER

PARTS BOOK - PAPER:

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

Machine specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BL10-3

WB140-2N pubinfok - REV2.fm 5/2/03

COMPLETE FORM DataKom Publishing Division

STREET ADDRESS ORDER DATE

PHONE NO. FAX NO. SHIPPING METHOD DISTR/BRANCH CODE

KDC91E 040202 CURRENT PRICES WILL BE CHARGED

● Page to be replaced Replace

( ) Page to be deleted Discard

● 00-1 c 10-7 10-36 10-65

● 00-2 c 10-8 10-37 10-66

● 00-2-1 c 10-9 10-38 10-67

● 00-2-2 c 10-10 10-39 10-68

❍ 00-2-3 c 10-11 10-40 10-69

❍ 00-2-4 c 10-12 10-41 10-70

00-3 10-13 10-42 10-71

00-4 10-14 10-43 10-72

00-5 10-15 10-44 10-73

00-6 10-16 10-45 10-74

00-7 10-17 10-46 10-75

00-8 10-18 10-47 10-76

00-9 10-19 10-48 10-77

00-10 10-20 10-49 10-78

00-11 10-21 10-50 10-79

00-12 10-22 10-51 10-80

00-13 10-23 10-52 10-81

00-14 10-24 10-53 10-82

00-15 10-25 10-54 10-83

00-16 10-26 10-55 10-84

00-17 10-27 10-56 10-85

00-18 10-28 10-57 10-86

10-1 10-30 10-59 10-88

10-2 10-31 10-60 10-89

10-3 10-32 10-61 10-90

10-4 10-33 10-62 10-91

10-5 10-34 10-63 10-92

10-6 10-35 10-64 10-93

WB140-2N, WB150-2N WB140-2N, WB150-2N 00-2-1 2

10-94 20-22 b 20-55 b

10-96 20-24 b 20-57 b ❍ 30-2 c

10-97 20-25 b 20-58 b ❍ 30-3 c

10-98 20-26 b 20-59 b ❍ 30-4 c

10-99 20-27 b 20-60 b ❍ 30-5 c

10-100 20-28 b 20-61 b ❍ 30-6 c

10-101 20-29 b 20-62 b ❍ 30-7 c

10-102 20-30 b 20-63 b ❍ 30-8 c

10-103 20-31 b 20-64 b ❍ 30-9 c

10-104 20-32 b 20-65 b ❍ 30-10 c

20-33 b 20-66 b ❍ 30-11 c

20-1 b 20-34 b 20-67 b ❍ 30-12 c

20-2 b 20-35 b 20-68 b ❍ 30-13 c

20-3 b 20-36 b 20-69 b ❍ 30-14 c

20-4 b 20-37 b 20-70 b ❍ 30-15 c

20-5 b 20-38 b 20-71 b ❍ 30-16 c

20-6 b 20-39 b 20-72 b ❍ 30-17 c